Yamaha CDRHD1300 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: CDRHD1300

Categorie: CD spelers

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia V956620

UAB

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

CDR-HD1300

CDR-HD1300E

HDD/CD Recorder

Enregistreur CD/Disque Dur

CDR-HD1300

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

VARO!

AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA

OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE

LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

VARNING!

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR

ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.

BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may

result in hazardous radiation exposure.

ATTENTION

L’emploi de commandes, de réglages ou un choix de

procédures différents des spécifications de cette

brochure peut entraîner une exposition à d’éventuelles

radiations pouvant être dangereses.

ACHTUNG

Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen oder

Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von

Bedienungsvorgängen, die nicht in dieser Anleitung

aufgeführt sind, kann zu einem Kontakt mit

gefährlichen Laserstrahlen führen.

OBSERVERA

Användning av kontroller och justeringar eller

genomförande av procedurer andra än de som

specificeras i denna bok kan resultera i att du utsätter

dig för farlig strålning.

ATTENZIONE

Uso di controlli o regolazioni o procedure non

specificamente descritte può causare l’esposizione a

radiazioni di livello pericoloso.

PRECAUCIÓN

El uso de los controles o los procedimientos de ajuste

o utilización diferentes de los especificados en este

manual pueden causar una exposición peligrosa a la

radiación.

VOORZICHTIG

Gebruik van bedieningsorganen of instellingen, of

uitvoeren van handelingen anders dan staan

beschreven in deze handleiding kunnen leiden tot

blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen.

(For U.S.A. model)

(For U.K. and Europe models)

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

CAUTION - VISIBLE AND

OR INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VARNING - SYNLIG OCH

ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA

DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.

VARNING - SYNLIG OCH

ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL

ÄR ÖPPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

VARO !

AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA

TAI

NÄKYMÄTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

VORSICHT !

SICHTBARE UND

ODER UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG

WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ATTENTION -

RADIATION VISIBLE ET / OU INVISIBLE LORSQUE L'ALLAREIL

EST OUVERT. EVITEZ TOUTE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.

000_HD1300(CA)H14_(7.5mm) 02.6.26, 10:01 AM2

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the

product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is

intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table specified by the

manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use caution when

moving the cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning

storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT!

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.

Model:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

100_HD1300(E)Caut 02.6.24, 6:51 PM2

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for

Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined

by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this

type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer,

please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend

you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

100_HD1300(E)Caut 02.6.24, 6:51 PM3

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT

• To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

• Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away

from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/

or cold. Avoid ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20

cm on the left and right, and 10 cm on the back of this unit.

• Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or

transformers to avoid humming sounds.

• Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold

to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high

humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

• Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this

unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do NOT place:

• Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

• Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

• Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit.

• Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a newspaper,

tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to

this unit, and/or personal injury.

• Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

• Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

• Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp

the plug; do not pull the cord.

• Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage

the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

• Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will

not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this

unit with a voltage other than specified.

• To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from

the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

• Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

• When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

• Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

• Before moving this unit, first check that there is no disc in the disc

tray. Finally, press POWER to turn off this unit, and disconnect

the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

Laser component in this product is capable of emitting radiation

exceeding the limit for Class 1.

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR U.K. MODEL

IMPORTANT

The wires in this mains lead are coloures in accordance with the

following code:

GREEN-and-YELLOW:Earth

BLUE:Neutral

BROWN:Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is

coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the

terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the

safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-and -

YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be

connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be

connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or

coloured RED.

For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate

3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described

above.

Note: The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as

a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

For Canadian Customers

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot

and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES–

003.

100_HD1300(E)Caut 02.6.26, 6:05 PM4

English

Hard Disk Drive (HDD)

■ Before using

• If you purchase CDR-HD1300; this model is not equipped with a hard disk drive (HDD). Please purchase a commercially available HDD

for internal use and install it on this unit correctly, following the attached instruction.

• It is necessary to format a new HDD after installation. Also refer the attached instruction for formatting.

• If you purchase CDR-HD1300E; this model is equipped with an HDD.

■ Capacity of the HDD

Following table shows the total recordable time for different capacities of an HDD.

■ Handling of the HDD

• The HDD formatted on your CDR-HD1300 cannot be used on other CDR-HD1300s for any reading or writing. If you wish to use the HDD

that has been formatted on other CDR-HD1300 on yours, format it again on your CDR-HD1300. See page 85 for formatting.

• Carefully handle an HDD before installation because it is a precision device. Also do not give vibration or shock to this unit after the HDD

is installed. Incorrect operation can damage the HDD and/or the data written onto the HDD.

• Yamaha and suppliers accept no liability for the loss and/or damage of data caused by vibration and/or shock.

■ CD player mode

This unit does not make any recordings if no HDD is installed. In this case, only reading of a CD, CD-R, and CD-RW disc is possible. Permit

some time until this unit becomes ready after the power is turned if no HDD is installed.

Total recordable time

Approx. 30 hours

Approx. 60 hours

Approx. 90 hours

Approx. 120 hours

Capacity

20 GB

40 GB

60 GB

80 GB

101_HD1300(E)Caut02 02.6.26, 6:06 PM3

iii

■ About this manual

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifica-

tions are subject to change in part for the reason of the improve-

ment in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has

priority.

• Some of the illustrations and names of the package contents etc

written in this manual may differ from the actual products and the

names written on the package etc.

Features

• Copying a CD to the HDD at maximum 10x speed

• Copying data on the HDD to a CD-R disc at maximum 8x speed

• Copying data on the HDD to a CD-RW disc at maximum 4x speed

• High quality recording by the Audio Master Quality Recording (copying from the HDD to a CD-R only)

• Long-hour-recording useful for recording satellite broadcasting programs and timer recording using an external timer

About This Manual

■ Structure

This owner’s manual is composed of following sections.

GETTING STARTED

This section explains necessary preparations such as remote control

and connection. Please read this before using this unit.

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

This section describes basic operations; copying from a CD to the

HDD and recording from an external component connected to this

unit to the HDD. Additional functions and operations are explained

in “Advanced Operations” following this basic operation. Skip this

part, if you wish to try to use all the basic functions equipped on

this unit.

EDITING

This section describes how to edit the data copied and/or written on

the HDD. Editing method is explained for “album”, “track”, and

“disc” respectively. See “EDITING MENU ITEMS” for outline of

the editing menu.

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW

DISC

This section describes basic operations; copying from the HDD to a

CD-R or CD-RW and recording from an external component

connected to this unit to a CD-R or CD-RW. Additional functions

and operations are explained in “Advanced Operations” following

these basic operations. Skip this part, if you wish to try to use all

the basic functions equipped on this unit.

DUPLICATION OF A CD

This section describes how to duplicate a whole CD.

PLAYBACK

This section describes how to play the data copied/written on the

HDD, your original CDs that are made using this unit, or commer-

cially available CDs.

APPENDIX

This section provides you with the information about system setting

of this unit and troubleshooting.

101_HD1300(E)Caut02 02.6.26, 6:07 PM4

E-1

English

Contents

GETTING STARTED

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ............................................ 2

CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT ........ 3

RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON

SYSTEM ...................................................................... 5

Rules of Digital Recording .................................................... 5

Notes on System .................................................................... 5

Data on the HDD ................................................................... 6

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS ...................... 7

Front Panel ............................................................................. 7

Remote Control ..................................................................... 8

Display ................................................................................. 10

Display Information ............................................................. 11

Rear Panel ............................................................................ 12

CONNECTIONS ............................................................ 12

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD ..................... 14

Copying All Tracks on a CD ............................................... 14

Copying Favorite Tracks on the CD .................................... 16

Advanced Operations .......................................................... 17

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT

ONTO THE HDD ........................................................ 20

Recording from the Digital Components ............................ 20

Recording from the Analog Components ............................ 21

Recording Using an External Timer .................................... 22

Adjusting the Recording Level ............................................ 24

Advanced Operations .......................................................... 25

EDITING

EDITING MENU ITEMS ................................................. 29

ALBUM EDITING .......................................................... 30

Album Editing Operation .................................................... 30

TRACK EDITING ........................................................... 39

Track Editing Operation ...................................................... 39

DISC EDITING ............................................................... 52

Disc Editing Operation ........................................................ 52

UNDO FUNCTION ......................................................... 58

BOOKMARK ................................................................. 59

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR

CD-RW DISC

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW

DISC ........................................................................... 60

Copying a Whole Group (Disc, Album or Bookmark) ........ 60

Copying Favorite Tracks on the HDD ................................. 62

High Quality Copying ......................................................... 63

Advanced Operations .......................................................... 64

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT

ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC .............................. 67

Advanced Operations .......................................................... 69

FINALIZATION .............................................................. 70

ERASING A CD-RW DISC ............................................ 71

DUPLICATION OF A CD

DUPLICATION OF A CD ............................................... 72

High Quality Duplication .................................................... 74

PLAYBACK

PLAYBACK .................................................................... 76

Playing a CD ........................................................................ 76

Playing Tracks on the HDD ................................................. 76

Finding the Desired Passage (Search) ................................. 77

Finding the Desired Group (Group Skip) ............................ 77

Finding the Desired Track (Track Skip) .............................. 78

Selecting Tracks Using On-Screen-Display (OSD) ............ 79

Listening with Headphones ................................................. 79

VARIOUS PLAYBACK .................................................. 80

Finding the Desired Passage by Time (Time Search) .......... 80

Setting the Play Style ........................................................... 80

Single Repeat Play ............................................................... 81

Full Repeat Play .................................................................. 82

Random Play ....................................................................... 82

Intro Play ............................................................................. 83

Bookmark Play .................................................................... 83

APPENDIX

DAC (DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTER) MODE .......... 84

HDD UTILITY ................................................................. 85

SYSTEM UTILITY .......................................................... 86

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ...................................... 89

DISPLAY MESSAGES ................................................... 90

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................... 92

ABOUT PRODUCT INFORMATIONS ........................... 93

SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 94

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM1

E-2

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

Make sure the following items are included in your package.

• Remote Control • Batteries (size AA, UM-3, or R6) (2)

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

HDD CDR

• Audio Pin Cables (2)

• Optical Cable

• Video Pin Cable

• Power Cable (for U.S.A. model)

• Coaxial Cable (for U.S.A. model)

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM2

E-3

English

GETTING STARTED

CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT

■ Discs that can be used for recording on

this unit

Be sure to use only CD-R and CD-RW discs made by reliable

manufacturers.

CD-R and CD-RW digital audio discs that display either of the

following marks can be used with this unit.

■ Discs that can be used for recording

• CD-R discs can only be recorded on once, and the recorded

material cannot be erased.

• CD-RW discs can be recorded on, have the recorded material

erased, and then recorded on again any number of times.

■ Discs that cannot be used for recording on

this unit

• Discs bearing marks other than those shown above.

• Discs intended for recording computer data.

• Discs intended for professional use or labeled “FOR PROFES-

SIONAL USE ONLY”.

■ 79-minute CD-R disc

The actual recordable time of the CD-R disc with “80” written on

its package is 79 minutes 57 seconds. This manual describes such

CD-R disc as “79-minute CD-R disc”.

■ Finalization of CD-R/CD-RW discs

To play back CD-R discs on a standard CD player and CD-RW

discs on CD-RW-compatible players, you need to perform the

process known as “finalization”. In the finalization process, the

Table of Contents (TOC) is written onto the discs.

Finalized CD-R discs

• CD-R discs can be played on a standard CD player.

• Further recording onto CD-R discs is not possible.

• Some CD players may not play back the finalized CD-R discs

properly due to differences in the playback system of different

manufacturers.

Finalized CD-RW discs

• CD-RW discs cannot be played on a standard CD player. CD-RW

discs can be played back on CD-RW-compatible players such as

this unit.

• Tracks written on CD-RW discs can be erased, and additional

tracks can be recorded after the TOC has been erased.

■ Erasure or loss of data

Yamaha and suppliers accept no liability for the loss of data written

on the HDD and CD-R or CD-RW discs, or any problems caused as

a result of using this unit. As a precaution, it is recommended that

the discs are tested after they have been recorded on. Furthermore,

under no circumstances do Yamaha and suppliers guarantee the

reliability of the discs.

■ Discs that can be played back

In addition to CD-R and CD-RW digital audio discs described

above, commercially available pre-recorded CDs bearing the marks

shown below can also be played on this unit.

Caution

• If you use the CDs that do not meet the CD standards, this unit

may not operate properly.

■ Playback of the CD-R disc copied with the

Audio Master Quality Recording mode

The Audio Master Quality Recording mode enables you to create a

CD with high quality sounds by increasing the linear velocity when

copying. The CD-R discs copied with this mode meet the CD

standards and can be played on a standard CD player. However,

some CD recorders may not play back these CD-R discs properly.

■ Playback on DVD players

Before playing back a finalized CD-R or CD-RW discs on a DVD

player, please check whether the DVD player is compatible with

CD-R or CD-RW discs or not. Refer to the owner’s manual of the

DVD player for more information. CD-R or CD-RW discs cannot

be played on a DVD player that is not compatible with CD-R or

CD-RW discs.

IMPORTANT

• Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may

infringe copyright laws.

FOR CONSUMER

FOR CONSUMER USE

FOR MUSIC USE ONLY

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM3

E-4

■ Handling of discs

Heed the following notes on handling of discs not to create any

cause for a recording failure, a loss of the recorded data, or a

malfunction of this unit.

• This compact disc recorder is designed for use with CDs

(including 8cm [3”] discs) bearing the , , , or

marks only. Never attempt to load any other type of disc into this

unit.

• CDs are not subjected to wear during play. However if the disc is

handled improperly, damage may be created on the disc to

adversely affect the disc’s play.

• When writing on the label side of CD-R or CD-RW discs, use an

oil-based felt-tipped pen.

• Do not use cleaning discs or warped discs. All of these could

damage this unit.

• Although playback of CDs is generally not affected by small

particles of dust or fingerprints on their playing surface, dust,

fingerprints, small scratches and direct sunlight on the recording

surface of a CD-R or CD-RW disc may make recording impos-

sible. Therefore, for optimal performance of the recorder and for

long-term enjoyment of your CD collection, handle discs

correctly as outlined in the following guidelines.

1. Hold discs by touching only the edges or center hole.

2. When a disc is not currently being used, remove it from the

recorder and store in an appropriate case.

3. With proper disc maintenance, cleaning should not be

necessary. However, should cleaning be required, wipe by

using a clean, dry cloth. Do not wipe with a circular motion;

wipe straight outward from the center.

• Do not try to clean the disc’s surface by using any type of disc

cleaner, record spray, antistatic spray or liquid, or any other

chemical-based liquid, because such substances might irreparably

damage the disc’s surface.

• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight, high temperature, or high

humidity for a long period of time, because this might warp or

otherwise damage the disc.

■ To prevent a malfunction of this unit

• Do not use any non-standard shaped CDs (heart, flower shaped,

etc.) available on the market, because they are off-balance in their

weight.

If a non-standard shaped CD is loaded into this unit, it may create

problems such as improper playback, opening the disc tray,

creating an usual noise, and this unit’s failure.

• Be sure to use a felt-tip pen or similar writing tool when writing

on the label side of the disc. Do not use a ball-point pen, pencil, or

other hard-tipped writing tool, as these may damage the disc and

may adversely affect further recording on the disc.

• Do not use the discs with glue left on their surface. It may get

stuck in this unit or create damage to this unit.

• When using an 8cm (3”) disc, do not place a normal 12cm (5”)

disc on top of it.

• Do not use the discs printed with commercially available label

printers.

No!

CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM4

E-5

English

GETTING STARTED

Rules of Digital Recording

■ SCMS—Serial Copy Management System

As a digital audio component, this unit conforms with the Serial

Copy Management System (SCMS) standards. The Serial Copy

Management System restricts copies made by recording digital

signals to first-generation copies only.

The digital program sources that have been recorded cannot be

digitally recorded again.

There are 2 rules as follows:

Rule 1

Digital sources such as commercially available CDs can be copied

digitally onto other recordable digital media with this unit (a first-

generation digital copy). However, the first-generation digital copy

cannot be copied digitally any further.

Rule 2

The source that was recorded via the ANALOG LINE IN (REC)

jacks can be copied digitally onto other recordable digital media (a

first-generation digital copy). However, the first-generation digital

copy cannot be copied digitally any further.

This unit monitors the SCMS status for each track when a digital

recording is made. If the track is protected from digital recording

and copying, it is not possible to make a digital recording and copy

of that track.

The SCMS standard does not apply to analog recording and

copying.

When making a copy from a CD onto the HDD, or from the HDD

onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, any of the copy methods described

below can be selected. The following selections are contained in

“Copy Method”.

•“Auto Dig/Anlg”:

Automatically switches to analog recording if the track cannot be

digitally recorded for SCMS.

•“Digital Copy”:

Performs digital copying of only those tracks that can be digitally

copied.

•“Digital Move”:

Performs digital copying of the tracks that cannot be digitally

copied by “Digital Copy” when copying from the HDD onto a

CD-R or CD-RW disc.

•“Analog Copy”:

Performs analog copying regardless of the SCMS standard.

■ Digital Move

This unit has a built-in HDD with large space that makes a long

recording possible. You can create your own CD by editing the

various program sources that have been recorded onto the HDD of

this unit and copying them onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

If you want to make a digital copy of the original data that has been

created on the HDD to a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the “Digital Move”

method is convenient. You can make a digital copy from the HDD

onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc even if the track is protected from

making a second-generation copy by the SCMS standard.

However, since the concept of “Digital Move” is that the data is

moved from the HDD onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the original

data on the HDD is erased when moving is complete. See page 65

for details.

RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON SYSTEM

Notes on System

■ Number of recordable discs and tracks and

their length

• One CD-R or CD-RW disc, or one disc on the HDD can be

recorded with up to 99 tracks on them.

• Once 99 tracks have been recorded, no further recording is

possible even if space for recording is available on the disc.

• The minimum length of one track must be 4 seconds. If a

recording is stopped while the track is less than 4 seconds long,

this unit will record for 4 seconds, and then stop recording. The

maximum length of one track is 99 minutes 59 seconds for the

HDD.

• 999 discs can be created at maximum on the HDD of this unit.

However, the number of discs that can be created is limited

according to the space availability (total recordable time) on the

HDD.

• The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59

seconds. However, since each track on the HDD is handled in the

unit of frame (75 frames are equal to one second), the maximum

length of one track or disc may vary slightly.

• When recording on a CD-R or CD-RW disc, 2-second silence will

be automatically added to the beginning of the first track.

Therefore the actual total recordable time will be 2 seconds

shorter than the total recordable time of a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

■ Source sampling rate conversion

• Digital input of this unit supports sampling frequencies of 32kHz,

44.1kHz, 48kHz, and 96kHz. This unit converts these inputs to

the 44.1kHz,16-bit digital signals and records them onto the

HDD, or a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Analog input is also converted to the same digital signal to be

recorded.

• This unit outputs the signals at the sampling frequency of

44.1kHz, 16-bit from its digital output.

■ Recording of non-audio signals

• This unit is designed exclusively for recording audio signals.

Recording is only possible for audio signals.

• When a CD with CD TEXT is copied onto the HDD, CD TEXT

will be automatically copied if it is not copy protected. When a

CD with CD TEXT is recorded from an external CD player, CD

TEXT cannot be copied even if it is not copy protected. To copy

CD TEXT, use the built-in CDR drive of this unit.

• If the digital signals contain graphic data such as CD graphics, the

non-audio signals will not be recorded.

• It is not possible to record from non-audio sources such as CD-

ROM or DVD.

■ Data processing

• A small amount of space may be used for data processing besides

recording the actual program sources.

• Although this unit is capable of recording 999 albums at

maximum onto the HDD, the data processing speed may slow

down if a large number of albums is created.

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM5

E-6

RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON SYSTEM

Data on the HDD

The data recorded onto the built-in HDD of this unit will be numbered and organized based on the following concept:

Disc

One consequent recording is counted and numbered as one unit of

disc. The HDD of this unit can record 999 discs at maximum.

(However, the number of discs to be created may be less than 999

for the space availability on the HDD.) The maximum length of one

disc on the HDD is 99minutes 59 seconds.

Track

99 tracks can be recorded onto a disc at maximum. (However the

number of discs tracks to be recorded may be less than 99 for the

space availability on the HDD.) One track must be 4 seconds at

shortest and 99 minutes 59 seconds at longest.

Album

A group of the source programs selected from different discs and

recorded as the playlist is called “album”. “Album” corresponds to

the “program” function (to play back favorite tracks in the desired

order) of a standard CD player. This unit can record 999 albums at

maximum onto the HDD.

Bookmark

This unit can make a temporary bookmark on a favorite track as

playing back. The list of the program sources marked is called

“bookmark”. This marking is temporary and cannot be duplicated.

However, an album can be easily created by copying the

bookmarked tracks. See page 32 for details.

Group

A collection of disc(s), album(s), and a bookmark are generically

called “group”.

Disc 1

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 99

✓

Disc 2

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 99

✓

Disc 999

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 99

✓

Disc

Track

Disc

999

Track

Disc Track Bookmark Album

Example of the playlist

Example of the copied tracks

with bookmarks

* The tracks are listed in the

order of copying.

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM6

E-7

English

GETTING STARTED

1 POWER

2 HDD

3 CDR

4 COPY

5 Front panel display

6 Disc tray

7 v (Open/Close)

8 TRACK NO./BOOKMARK

9 TEXT/TIME

0 COMPLETE

q MODE

w MULTI JOG knob/DIGITAL REC LEVEL control

e MENU

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

Front Panel

r CLEAR

t PHONES jack

y PHONES LEVEL control

u A.M.Q.R.

i REC

o t/e (Skip/Search)

p FINALIZE

a ERASE

s r/y (Search/Skip)

d INPUT

f w/d (Play/Pause)

g ANALOG REC LEVEL control

h a (Stop)

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

uiopasdfgh

23 4 5 6 7890q wer

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM7

E-8

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

Remote Control

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

HDD CDR

;

1 OPEN/CLOSE

2 COPY

3 TIMER REC

4 A.M.Q.R.

5 FINALIZE

6 TEXT/TIME

7 MODE

8 COMPLETE

9 CLEAR

0 Alphabetical/numeric buttons

q REPEAT

w RANDOM

e GROUP SKIP q

r t (Track Skip)

t d (Pause)

y e (Search)

u HDD

i REC

o ERASE

p TRACK NO. WRITE

a INPUT

s MENU

d +/–

f ENTER

g BOOKMARK

h INTRO

j GROUP SKIP w

k y (Track Skip)

l r (Search)

; w (Play)

z CDR

x a (Stop)

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM8

E-9

English

GETTING STARTED

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

30°

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

■ Loading the batteries in the remote control

1. Remove the battery compartment cover on the back

of the remote control.

2. Insert 2 batteries (AA, UM-3 or R6 type) according to

the polarity markings on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3. Close the cover until it snaps into place.

■ Battery replacement

If you find that the remote control must be used closer to this unit

than usual, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new

ones.

■ Notes on batteries

• Use only AA, UM-3, or R6 type batteries for replacement.

• Do not mix a new battery with a used one.

• A rechargeable battery cannot be used.

• Do not mix different types of battery.

• Do not attempt to short out the batteries by directly connecting the

plus (+) and the minus (–) with a piece of metal.

• Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an

extended period of time.

• If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Clean the battery

compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.

■ Remote control operation range

Cautions

• If operation of this unit by the remote control creates any

malfunction in any other components, change the placement of

the component.

• Do not spill any liquid on or drop the remote control. Do not

place it near a heater or in the bathroom where the temperature

and humidity become high.

• Make sure the remote control sensor is not exposed to direct

sunlight or strong lights. If it is, it may not function correctly.

Within 6m (20’)

Remote control sensor

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM9

E-10

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

1 HDD mark

2 TOTAL indicator

3 DUPLCT indicator

4 A.M.Q.R. indicator

5 Information display

6 CDR mark

7 REC indicator

8 ALBM indicator

9 MARK indicator

0 Playback mode/play style indicator

S indicator

G indicator

A indicator

REP indicator

RNDM indicator

Display

ALBM

MARK

A.M.Q.R. AUTO PRD DIG M

REC

LEVEL

TRACK

TOC GROUP

TIME

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

MULTRNDM ALL SYNC ANLG

TOTAL

DUPLCT

S G A REP

8888888888888

8 r9 0

e t y

23 4 5

q Recording/copying mode indicator

AUTO indicator

PRD indicator

MULT indicator

ALL indicator

SYNC indicator

w Copying method indicator

DIG indicator

M indicator

ANLG indicator

e Level meter

r TOC indicator

t CD-RW indicator

y MULTI JOG status indicator

LEVEL indicator

TRACK indicator

GROUP indicator

TIME indicator

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM10

E-11

English

GETTING STARTED

■ Display while playing the data on the HDD

Group number, track number and elapsed time of the

track being played

Group number, track number and remaining time of the

track being played

Group number and group total time

Group number and group remaining time

Group title or track title

Group title

Track title

The group title with the GROUP indicator and the track title with

the TRACK indicator are switched by pressing the MULTI JOG

knob.

■ Display while recording onto the HDD

Disc number, track number and elapsed time of the track

being recorded

Disc number and total recorded time on the disc

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

Display Information

The display located in the center of this unit provides the information about the drive (HDD or CDR drive) selected.

Each time TEXT/TIME is pressed, the display changes according to the operation.

Dsc001 1 004

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dsc001 1- 221

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dsc001 6545

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

Dsc001 -6240

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

LIVE AT CRANE

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

PRIDE AND JOY

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ Display while playing a CD

Track number and elapsed time of the track being played

Track number and remaining time of the track being

played

Disc total time

Disc remaining time

CD TEXT (when available)

Disc title

Track title

The group title with the GROUP indicator and the track title with

the TRACK indicator are switched by pressing the MULTI JOG

knob.

■ Display while recording onto a CD-R or CD-

RW disc

Track number and elapsed time of the track being

recorded

Total recorded time on a disc

Total recordable time on a disc

Dsc001 1 004

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dsc001 1543

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

1 004

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

1- 221

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

6545

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

-6240

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

LIVE AT CRANE

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

PRIDE AND JOY

TRACK

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

1 004

REC

GROUP

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

1543

REC

GROUP

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

- 221

REC

GROUP

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOTAL

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM11

E-12

NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS

Rear Panel

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

12 3

5 64

CONNECTIONS

Turn off the power of this unit and the other components, and unplug them from the wall outlet before making any connections.

■ Digital connections

• This unit has the DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks and DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks. Connect either the DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks, or the

DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks according to the component to be connected.

• Using the optical fiber cable, connect the DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack on this unit to the digital optical output jack on the other

component, and the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack on this unit to the digital optical input jack on the other component.

• When using the DIGITAL IN/OUT (COAXIAL) jacks, make connections with coaxial cables. Connect the DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack

on this unit to the digital coaxial output jack on the other component, and the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this unit to the digital

coaxial input jack on the other component.

■ Analog connections

• Make sure to connect the L (left) and R (right) input and output jacks on this unit to the correct L (left) and R (right) input and output jacks

on the other component.

• Connect the ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jack on this unit to the analog output jack on the other component, and the ANALOG LINE OUT

(PLAY) jack on this unit to the analog input jack on the other component.

• The ANALOG LINE IN (REC)/LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks on this unit are numbered # and $ respectively. Connect these jacks to the

jacks with the same numbers when connecting this unit to a Yamaha amplifier or receiver.

• To connect the turntable directly to this unit, first connect it to the phono equalizer and then connect to the ANALOG LINE IN (REC)

jacks on this unit.

Notes

• When you play the data on the HDD or CDs, signals are output both from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack and from the DIGITAL

OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks.

• Signals that are output through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jacks or the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jacks while playing the data on

the HDD do not have information about the track markers. Therefore if these signals are recorded by an MD player, the track markers may

not be placed correctly on the recorded MD disc.

1 HDD slot

2 VIDEO OUT jacks

S VIDEO jack

VIDEO jack

3 AC inlet

4 ANALOG jacks

ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks

ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks

5 DIGITAL jacks

DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack

DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack

DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack

DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack

6 RS-232C terminal

(U.S.A. model)

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM12

E-13

English

GETTING STARTED

CONNECTIONS

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

REC

PLAY

OUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

VIDEO IN

S VIDEO

VIDEO

■ Connecting a monitor

• You can display the list of groups or tracks to be played, copying/recording settings or the list of setting items on the monitor by connecting

the monitor to this unit. Connect the S VIDEO jack or the VIDEO jack whichever available on your monitor.

• Use a commercially available S-video cable to connect the S VIDEO jack on this unit and the S-video input jack on the monitor.

• Use an included video pin cable to connect the VIDEO jack on this unit and the composite video jack on the monitor.

• Arrow marks (➞) in the illustration below indicate the direction of the audio signal.

Coaxial cable

(optional)

To wall outlet

DVD player, cable TV tuner, etc

Monitor

S video cable

(optional)

Video pin cable

(included)

*RS-232C terminal

Optical cable

(one included)

**Coaxial cable

Amplifier or receiver

Audio pin cable

(included)

Audio pin cable

(included)

*This terminal is for connection of the personal computer. Information about the connection software is to be

announced on the YAMAHA website (see page 93).

**For U.S.A. model, one coaxial cable with ferrite core is included. Be sure to connect to the DIGITAL OUT

(COAXIAL) jack with this cable, directing the side with ferrite core to this unit.

■ Connecting the power cable

Plug the power cable into the AC inlet when all connections are complete, and then plug in the power cable to the wall outlet.

[Europe, U.K. and Australia models]

Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.

(U.S.A. model)

102_HD1300(E)01-13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM13

E-14

1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on

the front panel.

The message “WELCOME TO YAMAHA HDD/CD SYS-

TEM” appears on the display. After the message is displayed,

this unit is ready for operation.

2. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

open the disc tray.

3. Load the CD to copy from on the disc tray.

Place a CD correctly aligned in the recessed area of the disc

tray with its label side facing up.

4. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

close the disc tray.

Note

• The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of

the disc tray gently. If the disc tray is closed in this way, this

unit starts playback of a CD. Press a to stop playback.

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

Copying All Tracks on a CD

You can copy all tracks on a CD onto the HDD.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

2,4

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

2,4

This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of

the CD) when the CD is loaded. It takes approximately 10 to 15

seconds to complete the reading.

The following message appears on the display during the

reading.

When reading the information has been completed, the display

changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation.

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Reading

14 6817

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Total number of tracks Total time

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM14

E-15

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

5. Press COPY once.

The following message appears on the display, and this unit

enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet

at this stage.

6. Start copying.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying.

The copying conditions (initial settings) are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Copy”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: “Best Effort”

To change the settings, see “Copying menu setting” on page 18.

Notes

• It takes a few seconds for this unit to become ready to start

copying after w/d (w on the remote control) has been

pressed.

• This unit may create some vibration and rotation noise while

performing the copying process by rotating a CD at high

speed. If this problem occurs, lower the copying speed to

decrease the vibration and rotation noise. (See “Copy Speed”

on page 19.)

To cancel copying, press a.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

HDD π CD-RW

DIG

REC

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

003 1 π 1 000

DIG

REC

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

003 1 π 1 001

DIG

REC

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

CD TEXT

If the CD to be copied contains CD TEXT that can be copied,

CD TEXT is automatically copied when the CD is copied onto

the HDD.

Output of the signals during copying

• During copying at 1x speed, signals are output both from the

ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack and from the DIGITAL

OUTPUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks.

• During copying at 2x speed, signals are output only from the

ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack.

• During copying at 4x or more speed, signals are output neither

from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack nor the

DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks.

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM15

E-16

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

Copying Favorite Tracks on the CD

You can copy your favorite tracks on a CD onto the HDD.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

2,7 4

1 3,65

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

2,7

3,6

1. Load the CD to copy from on the disc tray.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD with its label side facing up. Then

press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the

disc tray.

2. Start playback of the CD.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start playback.

Playback is started from the beginning of the first track.

3.Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the

remote control) while your favorite track is being

played.

The MARK indicator lights on the display.

Press t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control) to

skip tracks, and repeat above operation.

To cancel a bookmark

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the

remote control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the

track. The MARK indicator turns off on the display.

4. When the bookmark have been placed to all favorite

tracks, press a to stop playback.

Tracks are listed and stored in order that the bookmarks have

been placed.

To cancel all bookmarks

Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the

front panel while this unit is in the stop mode. “Bookmark Clr”

appears on the display, and all bookmarks are canceled.

Note

• The bookmark placed to the track on the CD will be canceled

if the disc tray is open, or the power of this unit is turned off.

MARK

5. Press COPY once.

This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been

started yet at this stage.

6. Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the

remote control).

The list of the track that the bookmark is placed to is selected

as the group to be copied (the MARK indicator lights on the

display). Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK

on the remote control) again to return to the normal copy

standby mode.

7. Start copying.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying.

Notes

• It takes a few seconds for this unit to become ready to start

copying after w/d (w on the remote control) has been

pressed.

• This unit may create some vibration and rotation noise while

performing the copying process by rotating a CD at high

speed. If this problem occurs, lower the copying speed to

decrease the vibration and rotation noise. (See “Copy Speed”

on page 19.)

To cancel copying, press a.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

003 1 π 1 001

MARK

DIG

REC

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM16

E-17

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

Advanced Operations

■ Making an additional copying onto an

already recorded disc

When the copying onto the HDD, you can select the disc on the

HDD to make copy on. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press

GROUP SKIP q/GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to

select the disc number to make the copy on while this unit is in the

copy standby mode.

Notes

• If the disc number is not selected, copying will be made on the

disc with the smallest number available on the HDD.

• When a disc number with recorded tracks is selected, new

recordings will be added to the end of the last track that has been

previously recorded.

Disc number to make the copy on

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

GROUP SKIP wGROUP SKIP q

003 1 π 1 000

DIG

REC

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

■ Setting the copying mode

This unit provides various copying modes. Choose the one that suits

your needs.

Initial setting: All Synchro

1. Press MODE while this unit is in the copy standby

mode.

You can select the copying mode.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the copying mode.

Choose one of the modes listed below.

All Synchro (All-synchronized copying mode)

This mode copies all of the material from a single audio source

at the same time as the source programs are being played.

Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks

being recorded.

Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized copying mode)

This mode copies the set number of tracks at the same time as

the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to

be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode

is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

t/e, r/y

MULTI JOGMODE

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

t, y

+, –

ENTER

MODE

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM17

E-18

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the copying mode selected.

If “All Synchro” is confirmed, this unit returns to the copy

standby mode.

If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message

appears on the display. Go to step 4.

4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The number can be selected in the 1 to 99 tracks range.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the number selected.

This unit returns to the copy standby mode.

6. Select the track to start copy from by pressing t/e

or r/y (t or y on the remote control).

How many ?1

DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

MULT SYNC

■ Copying menu setting

You can make detailed settings on the menu for your copying.

Follow the steps described below for menu setting.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the copy standby

mode.

You can start setting the copying menu.

2. Select the menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The copying menu contains 3 items as follows:

• Copy Method (setting the copying method)

• Copy Level (setting the copying level)

• Copy Speed (setting the copying speed)

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the menu item to be adjusted.

4. Adjust the parameter for each item by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

See the further steps for detailed instructions on parameter

adjustment for each item.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the setting when adjustment has

been completed.

6. Press MENU to close the menu.

This unit returns to the copy standby mode.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG MENU

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

+, –

ENTER

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM18

E-19

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

■ Copy Method

Setting of the copying method. Copying may fail if the setting for

“Copy Method” is not correctly made.

Initial setting: Digital Copy

Digital Copy

This method always makes digital copies. Copying is not possible if

the tracks are copy protected by the SCMS standard (see page 5).

Auto Dig/Anlg

Digital and analog copying are automatically switched depending

on the track. If digital copying is prohibited by the SCMS standard

(see page 5), an analog copy is made. For those tracks that can be

digitally copied, a digital copy is made.

Analog Copy

This method always makes analog copies.

Notes

• In analog copying, the data may be copied at a lower sound level.

• The setting is stored in the memory and applies to future copying.

■ Copy Level

Setting of the sound level for copying. Sound level adjustment is

not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the copying

sound level to suit you needs.

The following message appears on the display when “Copy Level”

setting is confirmed in step 3 for “Copying menu setting” on page

18.

1. Adjust the copying sound level by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB

steps.

Copy Method

DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

Copy Level

DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

Level 0.0dB

DIG

REC

LEVEL

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the copying level setting.

Notes

• Level adjustment is not possible during copying.

• If the red part on the peak level meter lights at the loudest sound

levels, stop copying to adjust the copying level, and then resume

copying.

• If the level is adjusted, copying is made at maximum 2x speed.

■ Copy Speed

Setting of the copying speed.

Initial setting: Best Effort

Best Effort

Copying is made at the maximum speed possible depending on the

“Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings.

• When “Digital Copy” is selected: maximum 10x speed

• When “Auto Dig/Anlg” is selected: maximum 2x speed

• When “Analog Copy” is selected: maximum 2x speed

1x Copy

Copying is always made at 1x speed despite the “Copy Method”

and “Copy Level” settings.

2x Copy

Copying is always made at 2x speed despite the “Copy Method”

and “Copy Level” settings.

Notes

• If there are scratches or dust on the CD, the copy speed may drop

automatically even when “Best Effort” is selected.

• The setting is stored in the memory and applies to future copying.

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Copy Speed

DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM19

E-20

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

Recording from the Digital Components

You can make recordings from the component such as a cable TV tuner and a DVD player digitally connected to this unit.

Note

• Recording onto the HDD is made in the unit called “disc”. The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. If the

recording has been made exceeding the maximum length, the recording will be made continuously to the next available disc.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

65 5

4832

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on

the front panel.

The message “WELCOME TO YAMAHA HDD/CD SYS-

TEM” appears on the display. After the message is displayed,

this unit is ready for operation.

2. Press HDD to select the HDD.

3. Press REC.

The HDD mark flashes, and the disc and track numbers to be

recorded are indicated on the display. Recording has not been

started yet at this stage. (Recording pause mode)

4. Select the input source to be recorded.

Press INPUT repeatedly until the OPTICAL or COAXIAL

indicator lights up.

5. Adjust the recording level.

The adjustment of the digital recording level is not normally

necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level

to suit your needs.

Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to

be recorded.

By pressing MENU, the display changes for the level

adjustment.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control)

to adjust the recording level. When the adjustment is com-

pleted, press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the adjusted recording level.

Note

• Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak

level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels.

See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details.

6. Start recording.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording.

7. Start playing the source.

Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording

temporarily. The HDD mark flashes and the track number is

advanced to the next.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording.

8. Press a to stop recording.

The first track number of the disc at which recording has been

stopped is indicated on the display.

IMPORTANT

• Never turn off the power of this unit during recording.

Recording may not be correctly made, or the data on the HDD

may be damaged.

• During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to

shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged.

Disc number to be recorded Track number to be recorded

Dsc002 1 000

REC

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Dsc002 1 001

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Dsc002 1

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM20

E-21

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

Recording from the Analog Components

You can make recordings from the component such as a cassette deck and a turntable connected to this unit.

Note

• Recording onto the HDD is made in the unit called “disc”. The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. If the

recording has been made exceeding the maximum length, the recording will be made continuously to the next available disc.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

58321

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on

the front panel.

2. Press HDD to select the HDD.

3. Press REC.

This unit enters the recording pause mode.

4. Select the input source to be recorded.

Press INPUT repeatedly until the ANALOG indicator lights

up.

5. Adjust the recording level.

Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to

be recorded, and rotate the ANALOG REC LEVEL control to

adjust the recording level.

Note

• Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak

level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels.

See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details.

6. Start recording.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording.

7. Start playing the source.

Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording

temporarily. The HDD mark flashes and the track number is

advanced to the next.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording.

8. Press a to stop recording.

The first track number of the disc at which recording has been

stopped is indicated on the display.

IMPORTANT

• Never turn off the power of this unit during recording.

Recording may not be correctly made, or the data on the HDD

may be damaged.

• During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to

shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged.

Dsc002 1 000

REC

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Dsc002 1 001

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Dsc002 1

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM21

E-22

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

Recording Using an External Timer

■ Notes on recording time setting

• This unit is not equipped with the clock function. Use an external timer when making a timer recording.

• It may take 30 seconds to 1 minute after the power of this unit is turned on by an external timer until an actual recording starts. (This length

of time is subject to change depending on the condition.) During this time, no recording is made. Therefore set the time that is 2-minute

earlier than the starting time of the program to be recorded for turning on this unit.

• As a characteristic of an HDD recorder, it is necessary to store information to control audio data as well as audio data itself. This informa-

tion is normally recorded when recording is stopped. Therefore if the power of this unit is turned off before recording is stopped, no

information to control audio data and no audio data are stored. Set the time that is longer than 3-minute after the program to be recorded

finishes for turning off this unit by an external timer.

• Set the time that is 2-minute longer than actual recording time for the total recording time.

Following chart indicates the time flow when this unit makes timer recordings.

Example: To record the program that starts at 9:00 and ends at 10:00.

• Set the external timer to be turned on at 8:58.

• Set the external timer to be turned off after 10:03.

• Set 1 hour 2 minutes for the total recording time on this unit.

Notes

• Actual recorded material includes a little more than the set amount of time at both beginning and end of the recording. Delete unnecessary

parts using the editing operation.

• Recording will be stopped if copy protected digital signals are input while timer recording is being made.

• If you set the total recording time over 99 minutes 59 seconds, recording will be made extending several discs. To play the recorded

materials sequentially, select “Style All” as the play style. See “Setting the Play Style” on page 80.

See next page for the setting procedure.

Time to be set on the external timer

(2 minutes + recording time + 3 minutes or longer)

Recording time to be set on the CDR-HD1300

(Recording time + 2 minutes)

Recording time

Program starting time

CDR-HD1300 starts recording

(30 seconds to 1 minute after the

external timer turns on.)

External timer turns on

External timer turns off

Time flow

Program ending time

CDR-HD1300 finishes

recording

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM22

E-23

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

■ Setting for a timer recording

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

655,6,8,9

53,721

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

5,6,8,9

3,7

2,7

1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on

the front panel.

2. Press HDD to select the HDD.

Notes

• A timer recording cannot be made when recording onto a

CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• You can directly go to step 7 to set the total time of timer

recording by pressing TIMER REC on the remote control.

3. Press REC.

This unit enters the recording pause mode.

4. Select the input source to be recorded.

Press INPUT to select the input source from among OPTI-

CAL, COAXIAL, and ANALOG.

5. Adjust the recording level.

See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24.

6. Select a recording mode.

Select one of “Manual” (manual recording), “Track Synchro”

(track-synchronized recording) or “Auto Period” (auto-period

recording). Other modes cannot be selected when timer

recording is made.

7. Press and hold REC for approximately 3 seconds

(press TIMER REC on the remote control).

Following message appears on the display. Then set the total

amount of time of timer recording.

T.Span 1h 2m

REC

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

8. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to set the total time of timer recording.

Total time can be set as long as the recordable maximum time

by 1-minute step.

9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the total time of timer recording.

“Timer Standby” appears on the display.

To cancel timer recording setting, press a.

10.

Leave the power of this unit on. Turn off the power of

this unit by the external timer.

If the power of this unit is turned on by the external timer,

“Timer Standby” flashes for approximately 5 seconds. Then

recording starts according to the setting.

Note

• Once timer recording is set, recording starts every time the

power of this unit is turned on. To cancel the setting, press a

while “Timer Standby” is flashing, or while recording is

being made.

Timer Standby

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM23

E-24

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

Adjusting the Recording Level

There is an adjusting procedure for each input source to be recorded as explained below. Choose the one for your input source and follow the

steps.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

ANALOG REC LEVEL

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

ENTER

+, –

■ When recording a digital input source

The digital recording level is set to 0dB, the level of the input

source, as an initial setting. Further adjustment is not normally

necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level to suit

your needs.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the recording pause

mode.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the

source to be recorded.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the recording level.

Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB

steps.

Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level

meter does not light at the loudest sound levels.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to return to the previous display.

Notes

• The recording level can be adjusted while this unit is in either the

recording or recording pause mode. Once recording has been

stopped, the recording level is reset to 0dB.

• Adjustment of the recording level can be canceled by pressing

MENU when the level is adjusted in the recording pause mode.

• The recording level is set to 0dB by pressing CLEAR when the

level is adjusted in the recording pause mode.

■ When recording an analog input source

1. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the

source to be recorded.

2. Adjust the recording level by rotating the ANALOG

REC LEVEL control.

Rotate the control clockwise to increase the level and

counterclockwise to decrease the level.

Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level

meter does not light at the loudest sound levels.

Note

• The recording level can be adjusted while this unit is in either the

recording or recording pause mode.

Level 0.0dB

REC

LEVEL

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM24

E-25

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

Advanced Operations

■ Making an additional recording onto an

already recorded disc

When recording onto the HDD, you can select the disc on the HDD

for your recording. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press GROUP

SKIP q/GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to select the disc

number on which recordings are to be made while this unit is in the

recording pause mode.

Notes

• When no disc number is selected, recordings are made onto the

disc with the smallest number available on the HDD.

• When a disc with recorded tracks is selected, new recordings are

added to the end of the previous recordings.

Disc number on which recordings are to be made

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

GROUP SKIP wGROUP SKIP q

Dsc002 1 000

REC

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

■ Setting the recording mode

This unit provides various recording modes. Choose the one that

suits your needs.

Initial setting: Track Synchro

1. Press MODE while this unit is in the recording pause

mode.

The recording mode can be selected.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the recording mode.

Choose one of the modes listed below.

Manual (Manual recording mode)

All the recording operations including starting, stopping and

track marking are performed manually.

Track Synchro (Track-synchronized recording mode)

Starting and stopping are performed manually. Track markers

are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded.

Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized recording mode)

This mode records the set number of tracks at the same time as

the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to

be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode

is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources.

All Synchro (All-synchronized recording mode)

This mode records all of the material from a single audio

source at the same time as the source programs are being

played. Track markers are automatically placed between the

tracks being recorded.

Auto Period (Auto-period recording mode)

This mode makes recording for the set amount of time while

placing track markers at the set time interval. The length

between track markers can be adjusted in the 10 seconds to 30

minutes range by 10-second steps. This mode is convenient to

search for material recorded from FM broadcasts.

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

MODE

ENTER

+, –

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MODE MULTI JOG

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM25

E-26

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the recording mode selected.

If “Manual”, “Track Synchro” or “All Synchro” is confirmed,

this unit returns the recording pause mode.

If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, following message appears on

the display. Make a setting following steps 4 and 5.

If “Auto Period” is confirmed, following message appears on

the display. Make a setting following steps 6 to 9.

4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The number can be set in the 1 to 99 tracks range.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the number of tracks to be set.

This unit returns to the recording pause mode.

6. Select the time length between track markers by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

The time length can be set in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes

range by 10-seconds steps.

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the time length between the

selected track markers.

The following message appears on the display. The total

recording time can be set.

8. Select the total recording time by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the total recording time.

This unit returns to the recording pause mode.

Notes

• When recording to the HDD in the auto period recording mode,

the recording will be performed continuously to the next available

disc if the time length between selected track markers exceeds the

group remaining time.

• In the auto period recording mode, a time error can occur in a

frame unit. Therefore, the time of each track or the group total

time may not match the confirmed time length between selected

track markers or the total recording time.

How many ?1

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

MULT SYNC

Period ? 300

AUTO PRD

REC

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Total?0h4m

AUTO PRD

REC

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ Setting a condition at synchronized record-

ing

This unit automatically detects track intervals when recording is

made in track-synchronized recording mode, multi-synchronized

recording mode, or all-synchronized recording mode. You can set

the condition for detecting track intervals. Setting items are as

follows:

OPT TH Level

Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the

DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack as “no signal”.

Initial setting: –50dB, Control range: –90 to –20dB

COAX TH Level

Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the

DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack as “no signal”.

Initial setting: –50dB, Control range: –90 to –20dB

ANLG TH Level

Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the

ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks as “no signal”.

Initial setting: –40dB, Control range: –60 to –20dB

Int. Time

Sets the length of silence (“no signal”) that judges track intervals.

When the set amount of silence continues, this unit judges it as a

track interval and places a track marker.

Initial setting: 2.0 seconds, Control range: 0.5 to 5.0 seconds

End Duration

Sets the length of silence (“no signal”) that judges the end of

playback when recording in the all-synchronized recording mode.

When the set amount of silence continues, recording will be

stopped.

Initial setting: 12.0 seconds, Control range: 2.0 to 60.0 seconds

Note

• Settings for “Int. Time” and “End Duration” apply to each input

jack.

See next page for the setting procedure.

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM26

E-27

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

■ Setting a condition for synchronized re-

cording

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

Menu item selection appears on the display.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select “Synchro Setup”.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

Setting item selection appears on the display.

4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote

control) to select a setting item.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the setting item.

If “OPT TH Level”, “COAX TH Level” or “ANLG TH Level”

is confirmed, make a setting following steps 6 and 7.

If “Int. Time” or “End Duration” is confirmed, make a setting

following 8 and 9.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG MENU

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

+, –

ENTER

Synchro Setup

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the level.

Level can be set by 1dB step.

Example: To set “ANLG TH Level”

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the level.

Setting item selection appears on the display.

8. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote

control) to set an interval.

“Int. Time” can be set by 0.5-second steps, and “End Duration”

can be set by 1.0-second steps.

Example: To set “Int.Time”

9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to set an interval.

Setting item selection appears on the display.

Press MENU twice to close the menu and return to the normal stop

mode.

ANLG TH -40dB

LEVEL

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Time 2.0sec

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM27

E-28

■ Manual track marking

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

TRACK NO./BOOKMARK

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

TRACK NO.

WRITE

This unit can automatically place track markers. However you can

also manually place track markers during your recording. (Manual

track marking)

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (TRACK NO. WRITE on the

remote control) during your recording.

• A new track number is added at the location on the disc corre-

sponding to the time TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (TRACK NO.

WRITE on the remote control) is pressed.

• Manual track marking is possible after the recording has been

performed for 5 seconds from the beginning of the track, and a

disc cannot contain more than 99 tracks. Even if there is time

remaining on the disc, further recording is impossible once 99

track markers have been placed.

Notes

• The track markers may not be placed properly even if the

recording has been performed in the synchronized recording

according to the type of the source devices. To avoid this problem,

place the track markers manually.

• Manual track marking is possible even during synchronized

recording.

• You can place the track markers to the tracks that have been

recorded on the HDD by dividing the track. See “Track Divide”

on page 46.

103_HD1300(E)14-28 02.6.24, 6:51 PM28

E-29

English

EDITING

EDITING MENU ITEMS

You can make various editing operations on the albums, tracks and discs on the HDD. The editing menu is listed below.

Album Edit

Track Edit

Disc Edit

Undo

Album New

Edit Stored

Album Copy

Album Rename

Album Delete

Album Pack

Album Title

Track Shuffle

Track Level

Tr. Interval

Track Rename

Track Adjust

Track Erase

Part Erase

Track Combine

Track Divide

Track Pack

Add Fade In

Add Fade Out

Track Title

Disc Rename

Disc Erase

Disc Combine

Disc Divide

Disc Pack

Disc Title

To create a new album

To edit an already created album

To copy other group as an album

To change the album number

To delete an album

To eliminate unused album numbers

To assign an album title

To change the order of tracks in an album

To adjust the track level in an album

To adjust each track interval in an album

To change a track number

To adjust the beginning of a track

To erase a track

To erase the part of a track

To combine a series of tracks

To divide one track into two

To eliminate unused track numbers

To add fade-in to the beginning of a track

To add fade-out to the end of a track

To assign a track title

To change a disc number

To erase a disc

To combine a series of discs

To divide one disc into two

To eliminate unused disc numbers

To assign a disc title

To cancel the editing operation

—

✓

—

✓

—

✓

—

✓

—

31, 32

34, 35

35, 36

36, 37

41, 42

43, 44

46, 47

48, 49

49, 50

50, 51

54, 55

55, 56

Menu item Menu content

Selectable during

playback*

Page

*The item that can be selected during playback is marked with the ✓ mark.

■ Selection of the item during playback

Selectable item is changed as follows according to the playback status.

• Items with the ✓ mark in “Album Edit” can be selected while an album is being played.

• Items with the ✓ mark in “Track Edit” can be selected while a disc with the TRACK indicator turned on.

• Items with the ✓ mark in “Disc Edit” can be selected while a disc with the GROUP indicator turned on.

• No item can be selected while a bookmark is being played.

Notes

• To switch the GROUP indicator and the TRACK indicator, press the MULTI JOG knob.

• To switch the group to be played, rotate the MULTI JOG knob with the GROUP indicator turned on.

Alb001 1 001

ALBM

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Dsc001 1 001

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dsc001 1 001

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.7.26, 4:13 PM29

E-30

You can select the desired tracks from among the ones recorded on the HDD and store them as an album in this unit’s memory. You can also

edit the album afterwards.

Album Editing Operation

ALBUM EDITING

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

MULTI JOG

HDD

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

+, –

ENTER

HDD

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Press HDD to select the HDD.

2. Press MENU.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the editing the menu item selection.

4. Select the editing menu item to be set by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The followings are the album editing menu items.

• Album New

• Edit Stored

• Album Copy

• Album Rename

• Album Delete

• Album Pack

• Album Title

• Track Shuffle

• Track Level

• Tr. Interval

5. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

6. Start editing by following the setting steps (pages

31—38) for each item.

7. Press a when all editing has been completed.

The display changes to the one when this unit was in the stop

mode.

Album Edit

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ Editing during playback

1. Press MENU while the album to be edited is being

played.

The display changes for the editing menu item selection.

2. Select the editing menu item to be set by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The followings are the album editing menu items.

• Album Delete

• Album Title

• Track Shuffle

• Track Level

• Tr. Interval

3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

4. Start editing by following the setting steps (pages

31—38) for each item.

Notes

• If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is

canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state;

– This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having

started editing during the stop mode.

– This unit returns to the playback if having started editing during

the playback.

• If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is

canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode.

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.6.24, 6:51 PM30

E-31

English

EDITING

Album New

You can create a new album by selecting the desired tracks from

among the ones recorded on the HDD.

1. Select and confirm “Album New” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the source disc flashes.

2. Select the source disc by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the source disc.

The number of the source track flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the source track by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the source track.

The track number of the album being created will be advanced

to the next, and the display returns to the one shown in step 1.

Repeat steps 2—5 to select other discs and tracks.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Press COMPLETE.

A new album is created with the selected tracks recorded on it.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Notes

• You can switch the display by pressing TEXT/TIME while an

album is being made:

– If the title is assigned to the source disc or track, the title

appears.

– By pressing TEXT/TIME while the title is being displayed, the

total time of the album being made appears for approximately 1

second, and the display returns to the one in step 1.

– If no title is assigned to the source disc or track, the total time of

the album being made appears for approximately 1 second, and

the display returns to the one in step 1.

• You can create a new album using the tracks with bookmarks (see

“Album Copy” on page 32). Also see “BOOKMARK” on page

59.

ALBUM EDITING

Edit Stored

You can add tracks to or delete tracks from an already created

album.

1. Select and confirm “Edit Stored” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to be edited flashes.

2. Select the album to be edited by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to be edited.

The following message appears on the display.

■ When adding new tracks

4. Select the track to be added by pressing t/e or

r/y.

5. Select the disc that contains the track to be added by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be added.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

Edit 001 ?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Album to be edited

Disc that contains the

tracks to be added Track to be added

Track to be added or deleted

Dsc001 1

≥

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Source disc

Track in the album to be created

Source track

Dsc001 1

≥

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Continues to next page

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.7.26, 4:13 PM31

E-32

Album Copy

You can copy the entire disc, album, or bookmark to a new album.

1. Select and confirm “Album Copy” in step 4 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the group to be copied from flashes.

2. Select the group to be copied from by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The group to be copied from switches in the order of “disc” ➞

“album” ➞ “bookmark”.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the group to be copied from.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the

group to be copied from and the number of the album to be

copied to. The album to be copied on is assigned the smallest

available number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The selected group is copied to a new album.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

ALBUM EDITING

7. Select the track to be added by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

8. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be added.

When continuing to add tracks to the album, repeat steps 4—8.

9. Press COMPLETE.

The selected tracks are added to the album.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ When deleting tracks from the album

4. Select the track to be deleted by pressing t/e or

r/y.

5. Press CLEAR.

Note

• The tracks following the deleted track will automatically be

down-numbered.

When continuing to delete tracks from the album, repeat steps

4 and 5.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected tracks are deleted from the album.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Group to be copied from

Copy Dsc001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Dsc001≥ 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Group to be copied from Album to be copied to

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.7.26, 4:13 PM32

E-33

English

EDITING

ALBUM EDITING

Album Rename

You can move the album and assign a new number.

1. Select and confirm “Album Rename” in step 4 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to be moved flashes.

2. Select the album to be moved by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to be moved.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the

album to be moved and the new album number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the new album number by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new album number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected album has been moved and assigned a new

number.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Notes

• If the selected new album number is already in use, the albums

following this renumbered album will be automatically up-

numbered by one. However, if there is any unused album number,

only the albums up to that number will be up-numbered.

• The original number of the album that has been renumbered will

be available for future use.

Album to be moved

Album to be moved New album number

Rename 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Alb001≥ 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Album Delete

You can delete an existing album.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Album Delete” in step 4 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to be deleted flashes.

2. Select the album to be deleted by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to be deleted.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The selected album has been deleted.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Album Delete” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 30.

The album being played is confirmed to be deleted.

2. Press COMPLETE.

The album being played will be deleted.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the next album after

the deleted album. If no album follows the deleted album, this

unit plays the previous album of the deleted album.

Note

• The number of the deleted album will be available for future use.

Delete 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Album to be deleted

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.6.24, 6:51 PM33

E-34

ALBUM EDITING

Album Pack

You can re-organize the album numbers by eliminating unused

album numbers that have been created by changing album numbers

or deleting albums.

1. Select and confirm “Album Pack” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Press COMPLETE.

The album numbers are re-organized without unused album

numbers.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Album Title

You can assign a title to a created album.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Album Title” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to assign a title to flashes.

2. Select the album to assign a title to by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

Pack ?

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Title 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Album to assign the title to

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to assign a title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected album already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

4. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See next page for entering procedure.

5. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the selected album.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Album Title” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 30.

The album being played is confirmed for assigning the title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected album already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See next page for entering procedure.

3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the selected album.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the album with the

title assigned to.

Continues to next page

ALBM

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Before “Album Pack” is performed

After “Album Pack” has been performed (Unused album numbers

have been eliminated.)

: Unused album numbers

1346

123456

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.6.24, 6:51 PM34

E-35

English

EDITING

ALBUM EDITING

■ Entering the title characters by using the

MULTI JOG knob

1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise.

When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters

appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical

lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character

you wish to use for the title.

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected

character.

The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until

the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters.

■ Entering the title characters by using the

alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control

1. Select the character to be used for the title by using

the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control.

Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and

numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a

space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to

select the desired symbol.

2. Select the next character by pressing one of the

alphabetical/numeric buttons.

The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the

same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next

space.

Note

• If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new

character is inserted in front of the existing character.

■ Correcting the characters

Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/

e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to

cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter

and confirm the new character.

Track Shuffle

You can change the order of tracks in an album.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Shuffle” in step 4 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to change its tracks’ order flashes.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the album to change its tracks’

order.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to change its tracks’

order.

The number of the track to be moved flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote

control) to select the track to be moved.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be moved.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the

album to change its tracks’ order, the number of the track to be

moved, and the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

Continues to next page

Track to be moved

Shuffle001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Album to change its tracks’ order

New track number

001 1≥ 2

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Track to be movedAlbum to change its

tracks’ order

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.6.24, 6:51 PM35

E-36

ALBUM EDITING

6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the new track number.

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

8. Press COMPLETE.

The selected track has been moved and assigned a new number.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Shuffle” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 30.

The track being played is confirmed to be moved.

The number of the album and track being played and the new

track number appear on the display.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the new track number.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The track being played has been moved and assigned a new

number.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the moved track.

New track number

001 1

≥

ALBM

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Track being playedAlbum being played

Track Level

You can adjust the sound level of track in an album.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Level” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to adjust its tracks’ level flashes.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the album to adjust its tracks’ level.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to adjust its tracks’

level.

The number of the track to adjust its level flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote

control) to select the track to adjust.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to adjust its level.

Playback of the confirmed track starts, and the following

message appears on the display.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

Continues to next page

Track to adjust its level

Level 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Album to adjust its tracks’ level

Tr. 1 0.0dB

LEVEL

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Track to adjust its level

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.7.26, 4:14 PM36

E-37

English

EDITING

ALBUM EDITING

6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the level.

Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB

steps.

You can compare the level with the previous or next tracks’

level by pressing t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote

control).

You can also search the passage in the selected track by

pressing and holding t/e or r/y (e or r on the

remote control).

7. Press COMPLETE.

The level of the selected track is confirmed.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Level” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 30.

The track being played is confirmed to adjust its level.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the level.

Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB

steps.

You can compare the level with the previous or next tracks’

level by pressing t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote

control).

You can also search the passage in the selected track by

pressing and holding t/e or r/y (e or r on the

remote control).

3. Press COMPLETE.

The level of the track being played is confirmed.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the track with its level

adjusted.

Notes

• The level may change slightly out of the point that the track itself

changes during the playback of the album with its tracks’ level

adjusted. In this case, add the 1-to-2 second interval using the “Tr.

Interval” function described on the next page.

• You can not copy the album with its tracks’ level adjusted in the

Audio Master Quality Recording mode (see page 63).

• You can also adjust the copy level (see page 66) when copying the

album with its tracks’ level adjusted. The copy will be made in the

total level adjusted in “Track Level” and “Copy Level” on the

copy menu.

Tr. 1 0.0dB

ALBM

LEVEL

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Track being played

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.7.26, 4:16 PM37

E-38

ALBUM EDITING

Tr. Interval

You can adjust each track interval in an album.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Tr. Interval” in step 4 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 30.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the album to adjust its tracks’ interval flashes.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the album to adjust its tracks

interval.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the album to adjust its tracks

interval.

The number of the track to be adjusted flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote

control) to select the track to adjust its interval

between the previous track.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to adjust its interval

between the previous track.

The ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the

beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be

repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

Note

• If there is no track before the track that is selected and

confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this

unit returns to step 4.

Int. 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Track to adjust its interval between the previous track

Album to adjust its track interval

Int:3.5 513

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Playing time of the trackTrack interval

6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the interval.

Adjustment is possible in the 0 to 9.9 seconds range by 0.1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, the ending of the

previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the con-

firmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played with the

adjusted interval.

7. Press COMPLETE.

The interval between the selected track and the previous track

is confirmed.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Tr. Interval” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 30.

The track being played is confirmed to adjust its interval.

The ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the

beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be

repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to adjust the interval.

Adjustment is possible in the 0 to 9.9 seconds range by 0.1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, the ending of the

previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the con-

firmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played with the

adjusted interval.

3. Press COMPLETE.

The interval between the selected track and the previous track

is confirmed.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the track with its

interval between the previous track adjusted.

Int:3.5 513

ALBM

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Playing time of the trackTrack interval

104_HD1300(E)29-38 02.6.24, 6:51 PM38

E-39

English

EDITING

You can do various editing operations on the tracks that have been recorded on the HDD.

Track Editing Operation

TRACK EDITING

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

MULTI JOG

HDD

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

+, –

ENTER

HDD

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Press HDD to select the HDD.

2. Press MENU.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

3. Select “Track Edit” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

4. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the editing menu item selection.

5. Select the menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

The followings are the track editing menu items:

• Track Rename

• Track Adjust

• Track Erase

• Part Erase

• Track Combine

• Track Divide

• Track Pack

• Add Fade In

• Add Fade Out

• Track Title

6. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

7. Start editing by following the setting details (pages

40—51) for each menu item.

8. Press a when all editing has been completed.

This unit returns to the stop mode.

Track Edit

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ Editing during playback

Press MULTI JOG knob to light up the TRACK indicator.

1. Press MENU while the track (in the disc) to be edited

is being played.

The display changes for the editing menu item selection.

2. Select the menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

The followings are the track editing menu items:

• Track Rename

• Track Adjust

• Track Erase

• Part Erase

• Track Combine

• Track Divide

• Add Fade In

• Add Fade Out

• Track Title

3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

4. Start editing by following the setting details (pages

40—51) for each menu item.

Notes

• If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is

canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state;

– This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having

started editing during the stop mode.

– This unit returns to the playback if having started editing during

playback.

• If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is

canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode.

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM39

E-40

TRACK EDITING

Track Rename

You can move a track and assign a new number.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Rename” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to be moved flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to be moved by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be moved.

The number of the track to be moved flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be moved by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be moved.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number that

contains the track to be moved, the existing track number, and

the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Select the new track number by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

8. Press COMPLETE.

The selected track is renumbered.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Rename” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be moved and assigned

a new number.

The number of the disc and track being played and the new

track number appear on the display.

2. Select the new track number by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new track number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The track being played is moved and assigned a new number.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the renumbered track.

Notes

• If the selected new track number is already in use, the tracks

following this renumbered track will be automatically up-

numbered by one. However, if there is any unused track number,

only the tracks up to that number will be up-numbered.

• The original number of the track that has been renumbered will be

available for future use.

New track number

001 1

≥

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc being played

Disc that contains the track to be moved

Existing track number New track number

001 1

≥

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc that contains the track to be moved

Track to be moved

Rename 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Track being played

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM40

E-41

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

Track Adjust

You can change the beginning of the track to either earlier or later.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Adjust” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to be adjusted flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to be adjusted

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be adjusted.

The number of the track to be adjusted flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be adjusted by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be adjusted.

The confirmed track will be played.

The following message appears in the display.

Note

• If there is no track before the track that is selected and

confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this

unit returns to step 4.

6. Adjust the time length to change the beginning of the

track by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/–

on the remote control).

The time length can be adjusted by “minute: second: frame”.

(Frame is the unit used for values smaller than 1 second. 75

frames make 1 second.) The unit to be set is flashing. Move the

flash to the unit to be adjusted by pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the temporarily changed beginning point of the track

according to the time length setting made, and starts repeated

playback from the new beginning point to the end of the disc.

Press CLEAR to cancel the adjustment.

7. Press COMPLETE.

The new track beginning point is set.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Adjust” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be adjusted.

The following message appears on the display.

Note

• If there is no track before the track that is selected and

confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this

unit returns to the playback.

2. Adjust the time length to change the beginning of the

track by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/–

on the remote control).

The time length can be adjusted by “minute: second: frame”.

The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be

adjusted by pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the temporarily changed beginning point of the track

according to the time length setting made, and starts repeated

playback from the new beginning point to the end of the disc.

Press CLEAR to cancel the adjustment.

Continues to next page

Disc that contains the track to be adjusted

Track to be adjusted

Adjust 001 2?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

The time length to be adjusted

012 + 01000

TIME

Playing time of the track

012 + 01000

TIME

The time length to be adjusted

Playing time of the track

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.8.9, 9:32 AM41

E-42

TRACK EDITING

3. Press COMPLETE.

The new track beginning point is set.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the adjusted track.

Notes

• If the adjusted track includes a part that cannot be copied digitally

before adjusting, the adjusted track itself cannot be copied

digitally either.

• When the emphasis status of the track to be adjusted is different

from that of the previous track, the emphasis status of the track to

be adjusted takes precedence over that of the previous track.

Track Erase

You can erase a selected track.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Erase” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to be erased flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to be erased

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be erased.

The number of the track to be erased flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be erased by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

Before “Track Adjust” is performed

After “Track Adjust” has been performed (The beginning

of track 2 is adjusted earlier.)

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be erased.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

To check the track to be erased, press w/d (w on the remote

control). This unit starts to play the track to be erased

repeatedly.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected track is erased.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Erase” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be erased.

2. Press COMPLETE.

The track being played is erased.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the next track after the

erased track. If no track follows the erased track, this unit plays

the previous track of the erased track.

Note

• The number of the track that has been erased will be available for

future use.

Erase 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Track to be erased

Disc that contains the track to be erased

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM42

E-43

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

Part Erase

You can erase part of a selected track.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Part Erase” in step 5 of the

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to be partially erased

flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to be partially

erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/–

on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be partially erased.

The number of the track to be partially erased flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be partially erased by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be partially erased.

The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the

temporary beginning point of the partial erase and the

temporary beginning point (the point that is 10 seconds elapsed

from the beginning of the track) is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

6. Set the beginning point of the partial erase by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

The beginning point of the partial erase can be set by “minute:

second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to

the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the beginning point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the point that is 5

seconds before the beginning point and the beginning point.

7. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the beginning point of the partial

erase.

The passage between the temporary ending point of the partial

erase (the point that is 10 seconds after the beginning point)

and the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary ending point

is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

8. Set the ending point of the partial erase by rotating

the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The ending point of the partial erase can be set by “minute:

second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to

the unit to be set by pressing t /e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the ending point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the ending point and

the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point.

9. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the ending point of the partial

erase.

The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the

beginning point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending

point of the partial erase is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

Caution

• During the playback of the passage mentioned above, the

sound may missing at the joint between the passage before

the beginning point and the passage after the ending point.

However, the partially erased track is played properly after

the partial erase has been completed.

To change the ending point, press CLEAR once to return to

step 8.

To change the beginning point, press CLEAR twice to return to

step 6.

10.

Press COMPLETE.

The selected part is erased.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Ending point of the partial erase

020 Ed 02000

TIME

Playing time of the track

Continues to next page

Prt.Er.001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc that contains the track to be partially erased

Track to be partially erased

005 St 01000

TIME

Beginning point of the partial erase

Playing time of the track

Prt.Er. 005

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Pt.Fix 006

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM43

E-44

TRACK EDITING

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Part Erase” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be partially erased.

The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the

beginning point of the partial erase and the beginning point

(the timing you press MENU) is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Set the beginning point of the partial erase by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

The beginning point of the partial erase can be set by “minute:

second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to

the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the beginning point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the point that is 5

seconds before the beginning point and the beginning point.

3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the beginning point of the partial

erase.

The passage between the temporary ending point of the partial

erase (the point that is 10 seconds after the beginning point)

and the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary ending point

is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Set the ending point of the partial erase by rotating

the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The ending point of the partial erase can be set by “minute:

second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to

the unit to be set by pressing t /e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the ending point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the ending point and

the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point.

5. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the ending point of the partial

erase.

The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the

beginning point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending

point of the partial erase is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

Caution

• During the playback of the passage mentioned above, the

sound may missing at the joint between the passage before

the beginning point and the passage after the ending point.

However, the partially erased track is played properly after

the partial erase has been completed.

To change the ending point, press CLEAR once to return to

step 4.

To change the beginning point, press CLEAR twice to return to

step 2.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected part is erased.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the partially erased

track.

Caution

• The minimum length of a track is 4 seconds. It is not possible to

create a track that is shorter than 4 seconds by a partial erase.

Prt.Er. 005

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Pt.Fix 006

–30 –10 –6 –20

005 St 01000

TIME

Beginning point of the partial erase

Playing time of the track

020 Ed 02000

TIME

Ending point of the partial erase

Playing time of the track

1 2

Track

: Part to be erased

1 Repeated passage when setting the beginning point

2 Repeated passage when setting the ending point

3 Repeated passage after confirming the ending point

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM44

E-45

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

Track Combine

You can combine a series of tracks into one.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Combine” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the first track to be combined

flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the first track to be

combined by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing

+/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the first

track to be combined.

The number of the track to be the first in the combination

flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be the first in the combination by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be the first in the

combination.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number that

contains the first track to be combined, the track number to be

the first in the combination, and the track number to be the last

in the combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Select the track to be the last in the combination by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be the last in the

combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

8. Press COMPLETE.

The two selected tracks and all those between are combined

into one track.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Combine” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be the first track in the

combination.

The number of the disc and track being played and the number

of the track to be the last in the combination appear on the

display.

2. Select the track to be the last in the combination by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be the last in the

combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The two selected tracks and all those between are combined

into one track.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the combined track.

Notes

• When combining a series of tracks, the selected track numbers

following the selected first track will be available for future use.

• The track title for the first track is effective for the combined

track.

• If there is any track that cannot be copied digitally among the

tracks to be combined, the combined track cannot be copied

digitally either.

• When tracks with different emphasis status have been combined,

the emphasis status of the first track becomes effective for the

combined track.

001 1

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc being played

Track being played Track to be the last in

the combination

Disc that contains the first track to be combined

Track to be the first in the combination

Comb. 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc that contains the first track in the combination

Track to be the first in

the combination

Track to be the last in

the combination

001 1

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM45

E-46

TRACK EDITING

Track Divide

You can divide a track into two at the selected point.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Divide” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to be divided flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to be divided

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

be divided.

The number of the track to be divided flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to be divided by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to be divided.

The passage between the temporary dividing point (the point

that is 10 seconds elapsed from the beginning of the track) and

the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary dividing point is

repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

6. Set the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The dividing point can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The

unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by

pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the dividing point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the dividing point

and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point.

7. Press COMPLETE.

The selected track is divided into two at the set dividing point.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Divide” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to be divided.

The passage between the dividing point (the timing you press

MENU) and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point

is repeatedly played.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Set the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The dividing point can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The

unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by

pressing t/e or r/y.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches

for the dividing point according to the setting made, and starts

repeated playback of the passage between the dividing point

and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point.

Disc that contains the track to be divided

Track to be divided

Divide 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Continues to next page

Dividing point

012 + 01000

TIME

Playing time of the track

012 + 01000

TIME

Dividing point

Playing time of the track

Track

Dividing point

Passage to be repeatedly played

Track

Dividing point

Passage to be repeatedly played

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM46

E-47

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

3. Press COMPLETE.

The track being played is divided into two at the set dividing

point.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the second track of the

two divided tracks.

Cautions

• The minimum length of a track is 4 seconds. It is not possible to

create a track that is shorter than 4 seconds by dividing a track.

• One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. If the disc already contains

99 tracks, “Track No.Full” appears on the display.

Note

• The track numbers following the divided track will be up-

numbered by one. However, if there is any unused track number,

only the tracks up to that number will be up-numbered.

12 456

123456

1346

123456

Before “Track Divide” is performed

Divided into two

After “Track Divide” has been performed (dividing a track into

two)

: Space not being used

Track Pack

You can re-organize the track numbers by eliminating unused track

numbers, that have been created by changing track numbers or

erasing tracks.

1. Select and confirm “Track Pack” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Select the disc on which unused track numbers are

to be eliminated by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc on which unused track

numbers are to be eliminated.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The track numbers are re-organized by eliminating unused

track numbers.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Pack 001 ?

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc on which unused track

numbers are to be eliminated

Before “Track Pack” is performed

After “Track Pack” has been performed (Unused track numbers

have been eliminated.)

: Unused track numbers

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM47

E-48

TRACK EDITING

Add Fade In

You can add fade-in at the beginning of a track. The beginning of

the track is played with gradually rising level when fade-in has been

added.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Add Fade In” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to add fade-in flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to add fade-in

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

add fade-in.

The number of the track to add fade-in flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to add fade-in by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to add fade-in.

The beginning of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played

with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-in.

The following message appears on the display.

6. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control)

to set the fade-in length.

The fade-in length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts

repeated playback of the beginning of the track with a fade-in

of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5

seconds.

Press CLEAR to cancel the setting.

7. Press COMPLETE.

The fade-in is added to the beginning of the selected track for

the selected length.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Add Fade In” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed to add fade-in to.

The beginning of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played

with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-in.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control)

to set the fade-in length.

The fade-in length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts

repeated playback of the beginning of the track with a fade-in

of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5

seconds.

Press CLEAR to cancel the setting.

Continues to next page

Fd.In 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc that contains the track to add fade-in

Track to add fade-in

F.In: 3 001

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Fade-in length

Playing time of the track

F.In: 3 001

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Fade-in length

Playing time of the track

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM48

E-49

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

3. Press COMPLETE.

The fade-in is added to the beginning of the track being played

for the selected length.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the track the fade-in

has been added to.

Notes

• Fade-in cannot be added to a track that is shorter than 21 seconds.

• The fade-in effect becomes ineffective if the following editing is

performed to the track which the fade-in is added to.

– Erasing a certain part of the track (Part Erase).

– Combining the track (Track Combine).

– Dividing the track (Track Divide).

– Adjusting the beginning of the track (Track Adjust).

• If “Track Adjust” has been performed, the fade-in effect of both

the adjusted track and the previous track becomes ineffective.

Add Fade Out

You can add fade-out at the end of a track. The end of the track is

played with gradually lowering the level when fade-out has been

added.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Add Fade Out” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to add fade-out flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to add fade-out

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

add fade-out.

The number of the track to add fade-out flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to add fade-out by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to add fade-out.

The ending of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with

a 3-second (initial setting) fade-out.

The following message appears on the display.

6. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control)

to set the fade-out length.

The fade-out length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts

repeated playback of the ending of the track with a fade-out of

the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5

seconds.

Press CLEAR to cancel the setting.

7. Press COMPLETE.

The fade-out is added to the end of the selected track for the

selected length.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Continues to next page

F.Out: 3 1001

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Fade-out length

Playing time of the track

Disc that contains the track to add fade-out

Track to add fade-out

Fd.Out 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM49

E-50

TRACK EDITING

Continues to next page

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Add Fade Out” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 39.

The ending of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with

a 3-second (initial setting) fade-out.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control)

to set the fade-out length.

The fade-out length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1-

second steps.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts

repeated playback of the ending of the track with a fade-out of

the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5

seconds.

Press CLEAR to cancel the setting.

3. Press COMPLETE.

The fade-out is added to the ending of the track being played

for the selected length.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the track the fade-out

has been added to.

Notes

• Fade-out cannot be added to a track that is shorter than 21

seconds.

• The fade-out effect becomes ineffective if the following editing is

performed to the track which the fade-out is added to.

– Erasing a certain part of the track (Part Erase).

– Combining the track (Track Combine).

– Dividing the track (Track Divide).

– Adjusting the beginning of the track (Track Adjust).

• If “Track Adjust” has been performed, the fade-out effect of both

the adjusted track and the previous track becomes ineffective.

F.Out: 3 1001

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Fade-out length

Playing time of the track

Track Title

You can assign a title to a track.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Track Title” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 39.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number that contains the track to assign a title to

flashes.

2. Select the disc that contains the track to assign a title

to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on

the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to

assign a title to.

When the disc has been confirmed, the disc number that

contains the track to assign a title to flashes.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the track to assign a title to by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the track to assign a title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected track already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Title 001 1?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc that contains the track to assign a title to

Track to assign a title to

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM50

E-51

English

EDITING

TRACK EDITING

6. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See description on right for entering procedure.

7. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the selected track.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Track Title” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 39.

The track being played is confirmed for assigning the title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected track already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See description on right for entering procedure.

3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the track being played.

Playback starts from the beginning of the track with the title

assigned to.

■ Entering the title characters by using the

MULTI JOG knob

1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise.

When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters

appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical

lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character

you wish to use for the title.

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected

character.

The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until

the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters.

■ Entering the title characters by using the

alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control

1. Select the character to be used for the title by using

the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control.

Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and

numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a

space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to

select the desired symbol.

2. Select the next character by pressing one of the

alphabetical/numeric buttons.

The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the

same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next

space.

Note

• If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new

character is inserted in front of the existing character.

■ Correcting the characters

Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/

e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to

cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter

and confirm the new character.

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

105_HD1300(E)39-51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM51

E-52

DISC EDITING

You can do various editing operations on the discs that have been recorded on the HDD.

Disc Editing Operation

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

MULTI JOG

HDD

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

+, –

ENTER

HDD

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Press HDD to select the HDD to edit.

2. Press MENU.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

3. Select “Disc Edit” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

4. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the editing menu item selection.

5. Select the desired editing menu item by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The followings are the disc editing menu items:

• Disc Rename

• Disc Erase

• Disc Combine

• Disc Divide

• Disc Pack

• Disc Title

6. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

7. Start editing by following the detailed steps (pages

53—57) for each menu item.

8. Press a when all editing has been completed.

This unit returns to the stop mode.

■ Editing during playback

Press MULTI JOG knob to light up the GROUP indicator.

1. Press MENU while the disc to be edited is being

played.

The display changes for the editing menu item selection.

2. Select the desired editing menu item by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

The followings are the disc editing menu items:

• Disc Rename

• Disc Erase

• Disc Combine

• Disc Divide

• Disc Title

3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be

started.

4. Start editing by following the detailed steps (pages

53—57) for each menu item.

Notes

• If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is

canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state;

– This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having

started editing during the stop mode.

– This unit returns to the playback of the disc to be edited if

having started editing during playback.

• If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is

canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode.

Disc Edit

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM52

E-53

English

EDITING

DISC EDITING

Disc Rename

You can move a disc and assign a new number.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Disc Rename” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number to be moved flashes.

2. Select the disc to be moved by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be moved.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number to be

moved and new number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the new disc number to by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new disc number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected disc has been moved to and assigned a new

number.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Disc Rename” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 52.

The disc being played is confirmed to be moved and assigned a

new number.

The number of the disc being played and the new disc number

appear on the display.

2. Select the new disc number to by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the new disc number.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The disc being played has been moved to and assigned a new

number.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the moved disc.

Notes

• If the selected new disc number is already in use, the disc

numbers following this renumbered disc will be automatically up-

numbered by one. However, if there is any unused disc number,

only the discs up to that number will be up-numbered.

• The original number of the disc that has been renumbered will be

available for future use.

Dsc001≥ 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

New disc number

Disc being played

Rename 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be moved

Dsc001≥ 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be moved New disc number

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM53

E-54

Disc Combine

You can combine a series of discs into one.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Disc Combine” in step 5 of

“Editing during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

The disc number to be the first in the combination flashes.

2. Select the disc to be the first track in the combination

by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be the first in the

combination.

The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc numbers to be

the first and the last in the combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the disc to be the last in the combination by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be the last in the

combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The two selected discs and all those between are combined into

one disc.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

DISC EDITING

Disc Erase

You can erase a selected disc.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Disc Erase” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the disc to be erased flashes.

2. Select the disc to be erased by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be erased.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The selected disc is erased.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Disc Erase” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 52.

The disc being played is confirmed to be erased.

2. Press COMPLETE.

The disc being played is erased.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the next disc after the

erased disc. If no disc follows the erased disc, this unit plays

the previous disc of the erased disc.

Note

• The number of the erased disc will be available for future use.

Erase 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be erased

Combine 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be the first in the combination

Continues to next page

Disc to be the first in the

combination

Disc to be the last in the

combination

001 - 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM54

E-55

English

EDITING

DISC EDITING

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Disc Combine” in step 2 of

“Editing during playback” on page 52.

The disc being played is confirmed to be the first disc in the

combination.

The number of the disc being played and the number of the

disc to be the last in the combination appear on the display.

2. Select the disc to be the last in the combination by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be the last in the

combination.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The two selected discs and all those between are combined into

one disc.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the combined disc.

Cautions

• One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. When the total track number

on a disc exceeds 99, “Track No.Full” appears on the display.

• The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59

seconds. When the total time of the discs to be combined exceeds

99 minutes 59 seconds, “No Enough Spc” appears on the display.

Notes

• When combining a series of discs, the selected disc numbers

following the selected first disc will be available for future use.

• The disc title for the first disc is effective for the combined disc.

Disc being played

001 - 002

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be the last in the

combination

Disc Divide

You can divide a disc into two at the selected point.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Disc Divide” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the disc to be divided flashes.

2. Select the disc to be divided by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to be divided.

“Div.from” and the dividing point (the number of the track to

be the first after dividing) appear on the display.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Select the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the dividing point.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The selected disc is divided into two at the selected dividing

point.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Continues to next page

Divide 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to be divided

Track to be the first after dividing

Div. from 4?

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM55

E-56

DISC EDITING

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Disc Divide” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 52.

The disc being played is confirmed to be divided.

“Div.from” and the dividing point (the number of the track to

be the first after dividing) appear on the display.

2. Select the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the dividing point.

Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The disc being played is divided into two at the set dividing

point.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the second disc of the

two divided discs.

Caution

• The HDD can contain up to 999 discs. If the HDD already

contains 999 discs, “Disc No.Full” appears on the display.

Note

• The disc numbers following the divided disc will be up-numbered

by one. However, if there is any unused disc number, only the

discs up to that number will be up-numbered.

Track to be the first after dividing

Div. from 4?

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

12 456

123456

Before “Disc Divide” is performed

Divided into two

After “Disc Divide” has been performed (dividing a disc into two)

: Space not being used

Disc Pack

You can re-organize the disc numbers by eliminating unused disc

numbers that have been created by changing disc numbers or

erasing discs.

1. Select and confirm “Disc Pack” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

2. Press COMPLETE.

The disc numbers are re-organized by eliminating unused disc

numbers.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

Pack ?

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

1346

123456

Before “Disc Pack” is performed

After “Disc Pack” has been performed (Unused disc numbers

have been eliminated.)

: Unused disc numbers

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM56

E-57

English

EDITING

Disc Title

You can assign a title to a recorded disc.

■ Editing during the stop mode

1. Select and confirm “Disc Title” in step 5 of “Editing

during the stop mode” on page 52.

The following message appears on the display.

The number of the disc to assign a title to flashes.

2. Select the disc to assign a title to by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the disc to assign a title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected disc already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

4. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See description on right for entering procedure.

5. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the selected disc.

This unit returns to the editing menu item selection.

■ Editing during playback

1. Select and confirm “Disc Title” in step 2 of “Editing

during playback” on page 52.

The disc being played is confirmed for assigning the title to.

The following message appears on the display.

The cursor flashes.

If the selected disc already has a title, the title appears on the

display.

DISC EDITING

Title 001?

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc to assign a title to

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG

knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the

remote control.

See description below for entering procedure.

3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been

entered.

The title is assigned to the disc being played.

Playback resumes from the beginning of the disc with the title

assigned to.

■ Entering the title characters by using the

MULTI JOG knob

1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise.

When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters

appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical

lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character

you wish to use for the title.

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected

character.

The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until

the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters.

■ Entering the title characters by using the

alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control

1. Select the character to be used for the title by using

the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote

control.

Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and

numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a

space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to

select the desired symbol.

2. Select the next character by pressing one of the

alphabetical/numeric buttons.

The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the

same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next

space.

Note

• If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new

character is inserted in front of the existing character.

■ Correcting the characters

Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/

e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to

cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter

and confirm the new character.

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM57

E-58

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

COMPLETE

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

COMPLETE

ENTER

+, –

UNDO FUNCTION

1. Press MENU to display the menu item selection while

this unit is in the stop mode.

2. Select “Undo” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to display “Undo?”.

4. Press COMPLETE.

The previous editing operation and result are canceled.

The undo function does not work if any of the following

operations has been performed after the editing operation.

• After the editing operation, a recording has been made, or this

unit has been set in the recording pause mode to start

recording.

• After the editing operation, a copy has been made, or this unit

has been set in the copy standby mode to start copying.

• Further editing operations have been performed.

• The HDD has been formatted.

The following message appears on the display if the undo

function does not work.

You can cancel an operation and the result of a previous editing step on this unit (Undo function).

Notes

• The undo function does not apply to the addition of fade-in or

fade-out to a track because it can be canceled at any time.

• The undo function does not apply to assigning a title to an album,

track or disc.

Undo

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

No Undo data

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM58

E-59

English

EDITING

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

TRACK NO./BOOKMARK CLEAR

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

BOOKMARK

While playing a track, you can place a bookmark temporarily on the track. Bookmark is convenient for immediate playback of the desired

track and for creating a new album since the tracks with bookmarks are stored as a playlist.

■ To place a bookmark

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote

control) to place a bookmark during playback of the track. The

MARK indicator lights on the display.

Notes

• When the track with a bookmark is selected, the MARK indicator

lights on the display regardless of whether it is during playback or

stopped.

• You can create one list of the tracks with bookmarks on each the

HDD and a CD.

• The list of the tracks on the HDD with bookmarks will be stored

on the HDD. However, only one list of tracks with bookmarks can

be stored. If you wish to have more than one list, copy the playlist

in the album (see page 32).

• The list of the tracks on a CD with bookmarks will be erased if

the CD is taken out or the power of this unit is turned off.

• You can create a new album by copying the list of tracks with

bookmarks. Select “Mark” as the group to be copied. See “Album

Copy” on page 32.

■ To cancel a bookmark

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote

control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the track. The

MARK indicator turns off on the display.

■ To cancel all bookmarks on the operating

drive

Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the front

panel while this unit is in the stop mode. The following message

appears on the display, and all bookmarks are canceled.

MARK G

Bookmark Clr

MARK

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

106_HD1300(E)52-59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM59

E-60

When reading the information has been completed, the display

changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation.

When copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc without

finalization

When copying onto a new CD-R or CD-RW disc

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

51,324

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1,3

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Reading

14 6817

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

New Disc

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

Copying a Whole Group (Disc, Album or Bookmark)

You can copy all tracks in a whole group of discs, albums or a bookmark.

1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

open the disc tray.

2. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CD-

RW disc without finalization on the disc tray.

Place the CD-R or CD-RW disc correctly aligned in the

recessed area of the disc tray with its recordable side facing

down.

3. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

close the disc tray.

Note

• The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of

the disc tray gently. If a CD-R or CD-RW disc without

finalization is loaded, this unit starts playback of that CD-R

or CD-RW disc. Press a to stop playback.

This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of a

CD-R or a CD-RW disc) when a CD-R or a CD-RW disc is

loaded. It takes approximately 10 to15 seconds to complete the

reading. The following message appears on the display during

the reading.

The number of recorded tracks Total recorded time

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM60

E-61

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

4. Press COPY twice.

The following message appears on the display, and this unit

enters in the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started

yet at this stage.

5. Select the group on the HDD to be copied.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control)

to select the group on the HDD to be copied.

When a disc is selected:

When an album is selected:

When a bookmark is selected:

HDD “ CD-RW

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

003 1 “ 1 000

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

003 1 “ 1 000

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

003 1 “ 1 000

ALBM

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

Mrk 1 “ 1 000

MARK

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

6. Start copying.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying.

Notes

• OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc

depending on its recording condition. It takes approximately

15 seconds to complete the adjustment.

When the adjustment has been completed, and the message

above turns off on the display, copying automatically starts.

• The progress of elapsed time for the track being copied may

vary by the data processing inside this unit.

To cancel copying, press a.

Caution

• If copying is canceled by a being pressed, only the data that

has been recorded on the CD-R or CD-RW disc before the

cancellation remains on the disc. When “Digital Move” (see

page 65) is selected, the original data on the HDD which has

already been copied to a CD-R or CD-RW disc will be

deleted.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

7. Press FINALIZE to start finalization.

See page 70 for finalization.

Text data

If the copied data contains text data that can be copied such as a

disc title, the TOC indicator flashes when copying is completed.

If you attempt to open the disc tray by pressing v (OPEN/

CLOSE on the remote control), “TEXT Save ?” appears on the

display.

• In order to copy the text data, perform finalization procedure.

• In order to open the disc tray without copying the text data,

press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) again.

However once the disc tray is opened, text data cannot be

copied.

003 1 “ 1 001

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

OPC Adjust

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM61

E-62

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

Copying Favorite Tracks on the HDD

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

3,895

1462 7

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

3,8

1. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CD-

RW disc without finalization.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable

side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote

control) to close the disc tray.

If there are tracks with bookmarks already, go to step 6.

2. Press HDD to select HDD.

3. Start playback of a track recorded on the HDD.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start playback.

4. Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the

remote control) while your favorite track is being

played.

The MARK indicator lights up on the display.

Press t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control) to

skip tracks and repeat this operation.

To cancel a bookmark

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the

remote control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the

track. The MARK indicator turns off on the display.

5. When the bookmarks have been placed to all favorite

tracks, press a to stop playback.

Tracks are listed and stored in order that the bookmarks have

been placed.

To cancel all bookmarks

Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the

front panel while this unit is in the stop mode. “Bookmark Clr”

appears on the display and all bookmarks are canceled.

6. Press COPY twice.

This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been

started yet at this stage.

7. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select “Mrk”.

8. Start copying.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying.

Note

• OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc

depending on its recording condition. It takes approximately

15 seconds to complete the adjustment. When the adjustment

is completed and “OPC Adjust” disappears, copying will

automatically start.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

9. Press FINALIZE to perform finalization.

See page 70 for finalization.

MARK G

Mrk 1 “ 1 000

MARK

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

Mrk 1 “ 1 001

MARK

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM62

E-63

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

High Quality Copying

You can make your own CD with high quality sound with the Audio Master Quality Recording mode.

Cautions

• Audio Master Quality Recording mode can be used only for copying from the HDD on a new CD-R disc.

• Recordable time is 63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc, and 68 minutes for a 79-minute CD-R disc.

• Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used for recording from an external component directly to a CD-R disc.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1. Load a new CD-R disc.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD-R disc with its recordable side facing

down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

close the disc tray.

2. Press COPY twice.

This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been

started yet at this stage.

3. Select the group on the HDD to be copied.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control)

to select the group on the HDD to be copied.

4. Press A.M.Q.R.

The A.M.Q.R. indicator lights up on the display.

5. Start copying.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying.

The copying conditions are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Move”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: 4x speed

A.M.Q.R.

No Enough Spc

A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Can't Tr.Lev.

A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Cautions

• Once copying starts, no button operation is effective until

copying is completed.

• Never turn off the power of this unit or unplug the AC power

cord during copying.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

Cautions

• When total time of the group to be copied exceeds recordable

time on a CD-R disc (63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc and

68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc), the following message

appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality

Recording mode cannot be used.

• If you select the album with its tracks’ level adjusted as the group

to be copied, the following message appears on the display. In this

case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used.

• When a CD-R disc other than a 74-minute, 79-minute or 4x

writing compatible CD-R disc is loaded, or a CD-RW disc is

loaded on this unit, the following message appears on the display.

In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be

used.

Unavailable

A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

AMQR 1%

A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M

REC

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.7.26, 4:19 PM63

E-64

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

Advanced Operations

■ Setting the copying mode

This unit provides various copying modes. Choose the one that suits your needs.

Initial setting: All Synchro

1. Press MODE while this unit is in the copy standby

mode.

You can select the copying mode.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the copying mode.

Choose one of the modes listed below.

All Synchro (All-synchronized copying mode)

This mode copies all of the material from a single audio source

at the same time as the source programs are being played.

Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks

being recorded.

Full Auto (Full auto-synchronized copying mode)

This mode automatically performs finalization after all

synchronized copying is complete. A CD-R disc can be played

as a CD as soon as finalization has been completed.

Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized copying mode)

This mode copies the set number of tracks at the same time as

the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to

be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode

is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the copying mode selected.

If “All Synchro” or “Full Auto” is confirmed, this unit returns

to the copy standby mode.

If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message

appears on the display. Go to step 4.

4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The number can be selected in the 1 to 99 tracks range.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the number selected.

This unit returns to the copy standby mode.

6. Select a group and track to start copying from.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob to select a group and track to

start copying with. Select a group while the GROUP indicator

lights and a track while the TRACK indicator lights. Rotate the

MULTI JOG knob to switch the indicators.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOGMODE

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

MODE

ENTER

+, –

How many ?1

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

MULT SYNC ANLG

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.7.26, 4:20 PM64

E-65

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

■ Copying menu setting

You can make detailed settings on the menu for your copying.

Follow the steps described below for menu setting.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the copy standby

mode.

You can start setting the copying menu.

2. Select the menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The copying menu contains 3 items as follows:

• Copy Method (setting the copying method)

• Copy Level (setting the copying level)

• Copy Speed (setting the copying speed)

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the menu item to be adjusted.

4. Adjust the parameter for each item by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote

control).

See the further steps for detailed instructions on parameter

adjustment for each item.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the setting when adjustment has

been completed.

6. Press MENU to close the menu.

This unit returns to the copy standby mode.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG MENU

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

ENTER

+, –

■ Copy Method

Setting of the copying method. Copying may fail if the setting for

“Copy Method” is not correctly made.

Initial setting: Analog Copy

Analog Copy

This method always makes analog copies.

Digital Move

The data is moved from the HDD to the CD. Therefore, the track or

group data will be deleted from the HDD after they have been

moved to the CD-R or CD-RW disc by this method.

Digital Copy

This method always makes digital copies. Copying is not possible if

the tracks are copy protected by the SCMS standard (see page 5).

Auto Dig/Anlg

Digital and analog copying are automatically switched depending

on the track. If digital copying is prohibited by the SCMS standard

(see page 5), an analog copy is made. For those tracks that can be

digitally copied, a digital copy is made.

Notes

• In analog copying, the data may be copied at a lower sound level.

• The settings is stored in the memory and applied to future

copying.

Copy Method

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM65

E-66

COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

■ Copy Level

Setting of the sound level for copying. Sound level adjustment is

not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the copying

sound level to suit you needs.

The following message appears on the display when “Copy Level”

setting is confirmed in step 3 for “Copying menu setting” on page

65.

1. Adjust the copying sound level by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB

steps.

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the copying level setting.

Notes

• Level adjustment is not possible during copying.

• If the red part on the peak level meter lights at the loudest sound

levels, stop copying to adjust the copying level, and then resume

copying.

• If the level is adjusted, copying speed is made at maximum 2x

speed.

Copy Level

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

Level 0.0dB

REC

LEVEL

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

GROUP

CDR

■ Copy Speed

Setting of the copying speed.

Initial setting: Best Effort

Best Effort

Copying is made at the maximum speed possible depending on the

“Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings, and the conditions of a

CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• When “Auto Dig/Anlg” is selected: maximum 2x speed

• When “Digital Move” is selected: maximum 8x speed (CD-R)

maximum 4x speed (CD-RW)

• When “Digital Copy” is selected: maximum 8x speed (CD-R)

maximum 4x speed (CD-RW)

• When “Analog Copy” is selected: maximum 2x speed

1x Copy

Copying is always made at 1x speed despite the “Copy Method”

and “Copy Level” settings.

2x Copy

Copying is always made at 2x speed despite the “Copy Method”

and “Copy Level” settings.

Notes

• Depending on the condition of the CD-R or CD-RW disc, the

copy speed may drop automatically even when “Best Effort” is

selected.

• Select “2x Copy” or “1x Copy” when copying onto a CD-R or

CD-RW disc that does not support high-speed copying.

• The settings is stored in the memory and applied to future

copying.

Copy Speed

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC ANLG

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM66

E-67

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

You can record from an external component directly to a CD-R or CD-RW disc. Following is an explanation for digital recording from an

external CD player connected to the DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jacks on this unit.

Note

• Before starting to record, check the remaining time available for recording on the CD-R or CD-RW disc (see page 11).

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

63 82 9

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CD-

RW disc without finalization.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable

side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote

control) to close the disc tray.

2. Press REC.

OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc depending

on its recording condition. It takes approximately 15 seconds to

complete the adjustment.

If this unit determines that OPC is not needed for the disc

loaded, “Standby” flashes on the display.

The following message appears on the display and this unit

enters the recording pause mode.

Note

• If you leave this unit in the recording pause mode for

approximately 5 minutes, this unit returns to the stop mode

automatically.

3. Select the input source to be recorded.

When making a digital recording from an external CD player,

press INPUT until the OPTICAL or COAXIAL indicator

lights up.

When making an analog recording...

Press INPUT until the ANALOG indicator lights up.

OPC Adjust

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

Standby

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

1 000

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

4. Adjust the recording level.

The adjustment of the digital recording level is not normally

necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level

to suit your needs.

Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to

be recorded.

By pressing MENU, the display changes for the level

adjustment. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the

remote control) to adjust the recording level. When the

adjustment is completed, press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on

the remote control) to confirm the adjusted recording level.

When making an analog recording...

Rotate the ANALOG REC LEVEL control to adjust the

recording level.

Note

• Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak

level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels.

See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details.

5. Select a recording mode.

If you wish to record only one track, select “Multi Synchro”

and set to 1 track for the number of tracks to be recorded.

If you wish to start and stop recording, and place track markers

automatically, select “All Synchro”.

If you wish to automatically make finalization on a CD-R or

CD-RW disc as well, select “Full Auto”.

See “Setting the recording mode” on page 69 for details.

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:51 PM67

E-68

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

6. Start recording.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording.

Note

• In the multi-synchronized, all-synchronized, or full auto-

synchronized recording mode, this unit automatically starts

recording when the source component starts playback.

7. Start playback on an external CD player.

Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording

temporarily. “Wait” flashes on the display. The CDR mark

starts flashing in a few seconds and the track number is

advanced to the next.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording.

8. Press a to stop recording.

“Wait” flashes on the display. The number of recorded tracks

and the total recorded time are indicated on the display in a few

seconds, and then the first track number of the recorded tracks

is indicated on the display in a few seconds.

1 001

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Wait

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

14 6817

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

GROUP

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

9. When all recordings are completed, press FINALIZE

to start finalization.

See page 70 for finalization.

CD TEXT

Even if a CD with CD TEXT that can be copied is recorded

from an external player, CD TEXT will not be copied. In order

to copy CD TEXT, copy it on the HDD (page 14) first, then

copy it on a CD-R or CD-RW disc (page 60), or duplicate a CD

(page 72).

IMPORTANT

• Never turn off the power of this unit during recording.

Recording may not be correctly made, or the CD-R or CD-RW

disc may be damaged.

• If the power of this unit is turned off during recording on a

CD-R disc, recording may become impossible or the CD-R

disc may not be played back normally because information is

not written in the PMA (Program Memory Area).

• During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to

shock or vibration as it may cause skips or jumps to be

included in the recording.

Notes

• It is recommended to record a program such as a cable TV

broadcasting onto the HDD first. Then edit it on the HDD and

copy it on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. You can make your original

CD with less mistakes. See page 20 for recording onto the HDD

and page 29 for editing.

• This unit can duplicate a CD quickly. See page 72 for duplicating

a CD.

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:52 PM68

E-69

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

Advanced Operations

■ Setting the recording mode

This unit provides various recording modes. Choose the one that

suits your needs.

Initial setting: Track Synchro

1. Press MODE while this unit is in the recording pause

mode.

The recording mode can be selected.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select the recording mode.

Choose one of the modes listed below.

Manual (Manual recording mode)

All the recording operations including starting, stopping, track

marking and finalization are performed manually.

Track Synchro (Track-synchronized recording)

Recording is started and stopped manually. Track markers are

automatically placed by detecting track intervals.

Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized recording mode)

This mode records the set number of tracks at the same time as

the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to

be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode

is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources.

All Synchro (All-synchronized recording mode)

This mode records all of the material from a single audio

source at the same time as the source programs are being

played. Track markers are automatically placed between the

tracks being recorded.

Full Auto (Full auto-synchronized recording mode)

This mode automatically performs finalization after all

synchronized recording is complete. A CD-R disc can be

played as a CD as soon as finalization has been completed.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MODE MULTI JOG

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

MODE

ENTER

+, –

Auto Period (Auto-period recording mode)

This mode makes recording for the set amount of time while

placing track markers at the set time interval. The length

between track markers can be adjusted in the 10 seconds to 30

minutes range by 10-second steps. This mode is convenient to

search for material recorded from FM broadcasts.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the recording mode selected.

If “Manual”, “Track Synchro”, “All Synchro” or “Full Auto” is

confirmed, this unit returns to the recording pause mode.

If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message

appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 4 and 5.

When “Auto Period” is confirmed, the following message

appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 6—9.

4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

The number can be set in the 1 to 99 tracks range.

5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the number of tracks to be set.

This unit returns to the recording pause mode.

6. Select the time length between track markers by

rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the

remote control).

The time length can be set in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes

range by 10-seconds steps.

7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the time length between the

selected track markers.

The following message appears on the display. The total

recording time can be set.

8. Select the total recording time by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the total recording time.

This unit returns to the recording pause mode.

How many ?1

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

MULT SYNC

Period ? 300

AUTO PRD

REC

TIME

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Total? 0h 4m

AUTO PRD

REC

TIME

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:52 PM69

E-70

FINALIZATION

Finalization is the process that concludes recording, and allows a CD-R disc to be played on a standard CD player or a CD-RW disc to be

played on a CD-RW-compatible player.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

3212

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1. Load a recorded CD-R or CD-RW disc without

finalization.

2. Press FINALIZE.

To cancel finalization, press a.

If you wish to make finalization at slower speed, press and hold

FINALIZE for approximately 3 seconds.

The following message appears on the display and this unit

enters the slow finalization mode.

3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start finaliza-

tion.

The level meter shows the finalization progress on the display.

Finalize OK ?

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Slow Fnlz OK?

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

When starting finalization

During finalization

Finalizing

REC

CDR

When finalization is completed, the TOC indicator lights up

and this unit enters the stop mode.

Cautions

• Further recording is not possible onto a finalized CD-R disc.

Make sure that all recordings have been completed before

finalization.

• Make sure a CD-R or CD-RW disc has no scratches, dust,

fingerprints or similar marks before loading. Wipe a CD-R or

CD-RW disc if there is any dust on it.

See page 4 for handling of a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Once the finalization process has started, no other operation

is possible until finalization is completed.

• Never turn off the power or disconnect the power cord during

finalization.

When a CD-R disc has been finalized

When a CD-RW disc has been finalized

TOC

CDR

TOC

CDR W

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:52 PM70

E-71

English

COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC

ERASING A CD-RW DISC

You can erase the data recorded on a CD-RW disc. New recordings can be made in the space created by erasing. The following 4 types of

erasing are possible with this unit.

■ Last Track Erase

This operation erases the last track on a disc. “Last Track Erase”

cannot be performed if a CD-RW disc has been finalized, or only

one track has been recorded on the disc.

1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased.

2. Press ERASE.

The following message appears on the display.

Go to the next step when erasing only the last track. To erase

other tracks as well, select the track number to start erasing

from by rotating the MULTI JOG knob.

To cancel erasing, press a.

3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing.

“Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the

erasing progress.

4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has

been completed.

■ All Track Erase

This operation erases all tracks recorded on a CD-RW disc. TOC

will be erased also if a CD-RW disc has been finalized.

1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased.

2. Press ERASE repeatedly until “Erase ALL ?” appears

on the display.

To cancel erasing, press a.

3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing.

“Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the

erasing progress.

4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has

been completed.

Track to start erasing from Last track

Erase Last ?

TRACK

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Erase 2- 9?

TRACK

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Erase ALL ?

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ TOC Erase

This operation is only available on a CD-RW disc that has been

finalized. After the Table of Contents (TOC) has been erased, the

effects of finalization are defeated, and further recording is

possible.

1. Load the CD-RW disc that has been finalized.

2. Press ERASE.

“Erase TOC ?” appears on the display.

To cancel erasing, press a.

3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing.

“Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the

erasing progress.

4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has

been completed.

Note

• The TOC indicator turns off when “TOC Erase” has been

completed.

■ Disc Erase

This operation erases all information recorded on a CD-RW disc.

1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased.

2. Press and hold ERASE for approximately 2 seconds.

“Erase Disc ?” appears on the display.

To cancel erasing, press a.

3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing.

“Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the

erasing progress.

4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has

been completed.

Cautions

• Never turn off the power of this unit during erasing.

• If “Check Disc” appears on the display during erasing, and

erasing stops, there may be dust or damage on the CD-RW disc.

Check the CD-RW disc and start the erasing operation again.

• Erasing a disc takes approximately 20 minutes.

Erase TOC ?

TOC

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Erase Disc ?

CDR W

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

107_HD1300(E)60-71 02.6.24, 6:52 PM71

E-72

DUPLICATION OF A CD

You can quickly duplicate a commercially available CD using this unit.

Caution

• Duplication may not correctly made on a CD-R or CD-RW disc that does not support high speed writing. In this case, copy a CD onto the

HDD first, then perform “Digital Move” on a CD-R or CD-RW disc at 2x or 1x speed.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

1,3,6 5

2,64

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1,3,6

1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

open the disc tray.

2. Load the CD to duplicate on the disc tray.

Place the CD correctly aligned in the recessed area of the disc

tray with its label side facing up.

3. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

close the disc tray.

Note

• The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of

the disc tray gently. If the disc tray is closed in this way, this

unit starts playback of the CD. Press a to stop playback.

This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of a

CD) when a CD is loaded. It takes approximately 10 to 15

seconds. The following message appears on the display during

reading.

When reading the information has been completed, the display

changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation.

4. Press COPY three times.

The following message appears on the display, and this unit

enters the copy standby mode. Duplication has not been started

yet at this stage.

DIG

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

Duplicate

TOC

DIG

REC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

1π 1 000

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Reading

14 6817

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Total number of tracks Total time

108_HD1300(E)72-75 02.6.24, 6:52 PM72

E-73

English

DUPLIACTION OF A CD

5. Start copying from the CD onto the HDD.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. The

copying conditions are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Copy”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: “Best Effort”

Cautions

• If copying is canceled by a being pressed, even the data that

has been copied before cancellation does not remain on the

HDD.

• If a track is copy protected by the SCMS standard, that track

cannot be copied onto the HDD.

When copying from the CD onto the HDD has been

completed, the following message appears on the

display.

6. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc on the disc tray.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable

side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote

control) to close the disc tray.

Caution

• New recordings cannot be added to a CD-R or CD-RW disc

on which some tracks have been previously recorded.

When the disc tray is closed, this unit starts reading informa-

tion of the CD-R or CD-RW disc loaded. When reading has

been completed, copying from the HDD to a CD-R or CD-RW

disc starts automatically.

The copying conditions are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Move”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: “Best Effort”

Note

• OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc

depending on its recording condition after reading has been

completed.

When the adjustment has been completed, and the above

message turns off on the display, this unit automatically starts

copying.

Change Discs!

DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

1 “ 1 001

AUTO DIG M

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

DUPLCT

OPC Adjust

AUTO DIG M

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

DUPLCT

Caution

• If copying is canceled by a being pressed, only the data that

has been recorded on the CD-R or CD-RW disc before

cancellation remains on the disc. The original data on the

HDD being copied will be deleted.

When copying has been completed, the HDD opera-

tion automatically stops, and finalization of the CD-R

or CD-RW disc starts.

After finalization has been completed, this unit enters the stop

mode.

CD TEXT

If a CD to be duplicated has CD TEXT that can be copied, CD

TEXT will be automatically copied at duplication.

Finalizing

AUTO DIG M

REC

CDR

SYNC

DUPLCT

DUPLICATION OF A CD

108_HD1300(E)72-75 02.6.24, 6:52 PM73

E-74

DUPLICATION OF A CD

High Quality Duplication

You can duplicate a CD with high quality sound with the Audio Master Quality Recording mode.

Cautions

• Audio Master Quality Recording mode can be used only for duplicating on a new CD-R disc.

• Recordable time is 63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc, and 68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc.

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

1,5 4

1,52

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1,5

1. Load a CD to be duplicated.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD with its label side facing up. Then

press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the

disc tray.

2. Press COPY 3 times.

This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been

started yet at this stage.

3. Press A.M.Q.R.

The A.M.Q.R. indicator lights up on the display.

4. Start copying from the CD onto the HDD.

Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. The

copying conditions are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Copy”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: “Best Effort”

Cautions

• If copying is canceled by a being pressed, even the data that

has been copied before cancellation does not remain on the

HDD.

• If a track is copy protected by the SCMS standard, that track

cannot be copied onto the HDD.

When copying from the CD onto the HDD has been

completed, the following message appears on the

display.

5. Load a new CD-R disc.

Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the

disc tray, and place a CD-R disc with its recordable side facing

down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

close the disc tray.

Caution

• New recording cannot be added to a CD-R disc on which

some tracks have been previously recorded.

When the disc tray is closed, this unit starts reading informa-

tion of a CD-R disc loaded. When reading has been completed,

copying from the HDD to a CD-R will automatically starts.

The copying conditions are as follows:

• Copy Method: “Digital Move”

• Copy Level: 0dB

• Copy Speed: 4x speed

A.M.Q.R.

DUPLCT

Change Discs!

A.M.Q.R. DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

AMQR 1%

A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M

REC

CDR

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYNC

DUPLCT

108_HD1300(E)72-75 02.6.24, 6:52 PM74

E-75

English

DUPLIACTION OF A CD

DUPLICATION OF A CD

Cautions

• When total time of the CD to be duplicated exceeds

recordable time on a CD-R disc (63 minutes for a 74-minute

CD-R disc and 68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc), the

following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio

Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used.

• When a CD-R disc other than a 74-minute, 79-minute or 4x

writing compatible CD-R disc is loaded, or a CD-RW disc is

loaded on this unit, the following message appears on the

display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode

cannot be used.

• Once copying starts, no button operation is effective until

copying is completed.

When copying has been completed, the operation of

the HDD and the CD automatically stops.

No Enough Spc

A.M.Q.R. DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

Unavailable

A.M.Q.R. DIG

REC

TOC

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

ALL SYNC

DUPLCT

108_HD1300(E)72-75 02.6.24, 6:52 PM75

E-76

PLAYBACK

This unit can play back tracks recorded on the 2 types of recording media; HDD and CD. Press HDD to play tracks recorded on the HDD,

and press CDR to play tracks recorded on a CD (including a CD-R and a CD-RW disc).

Playing a CD

1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to

open the disc tray.

2. Load the CD to be played on the disc tray and close

the disc tray by pressing v (OPEN/CLOSE on the

remote control).

This unit starts reading the disc information. “Reading” flashes

on the display during reading.

3. Start playback.

When w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed, this unit starts

playback from the beginning of the first track.

4. Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop playback

temporarily.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume playback.

5. Press a to stop playback.

Playing Tracks on the HDD

1. Make sure that the GROUP indicator lights up, then

rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press GROUP SKIP q or

GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to select a

group (disc, album, or bookmark) to be played.

2. Start playback.

When w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed, this unit starts

playback from the beginning of the first track of the selected

group.

3. Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop playback

temporarily.

Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume playback.

4. Press a to stop playback.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

2 1,2 3,4 5

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1,2

3,4

1 001

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

2,3 4

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

2,3

Dsc001 1 001

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

IMPORTANT

• Never turn off the power of this unit during the playback. The data on the HDD may be damaged.

• During the playback, make sure that this unit is not subjected to shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged.

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM76

E-77

English

PLAYBACK

Finding the Desired Passage (Search)

■ To go forward rapidly

Press and hold r/y (r on the remote control) during

playback.

When the button is released, normal playback resumes.

■ To go backward rapidly

Press and hold t/e (e on the remote control) during

playback.

When the button is released, normal playback resumes.

Notes

• Search is possible in the pause mode. No sound can be heard

when searching is performed during the pause mode.

• Neither search nor pause is possible at the interval added by “Tr.

Interval” on the ALBUM EDITING menu (see page 38).

Finding the Desired Group

(Group Skip)

You can select the group (disc, album, or bookmark) recorded on

the HDD.

■ To select the desired group with the MULTI

JOG knob

Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the GROUP indicator on

the display.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise to advance to the next

group and the following groups or counterclockwise to return to the

previous group and other previous groups.

■ To advance to the next group

Press GROUP SKIP w on the remote control.

Press GROUP SKIP w repeatedly to advance to other groups.

■ To return to the previous group

Press GROUP SKIP q on the remote control.

Press GROUP SKIP q repeatedly to return to other previous

groups.

Notes

• Group skip is possible in the play, pause and stop modes.

• Playback starts from the beginning of the first track of the

selected group.

Resume Play function

If you press w/d (w on the remote control) after a has been pressed to stop playback, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the

track that has been stopped. This function is called “Resume Play”. To cancel the “Resume Play” function, press a to stop playback first

and then press a again. After the cancellation, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the first track recorded on a disc (or an

album) or a CD.

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

t/er/y

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

GROUP SKIP wGROUP SKIP q

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM77

E-78

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

MULTI JOG

t/er/y

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

PLAYBACK

Finding the Desired Track (Track Skip)

Numeric buttons

■ To play the desired track

Select the desired track by using the numeric buttons on the remote

control. The selected track number appears on the display.

Example: To select track 25

Press +10 twice, and then immediately press 5 once.

Note

• If a number higher than the last track number recorded on a disc

(or an album) or a CD is entered by using the remote control, this

unit plays the last track.

Note

• Track skip is possible in the play, pause and stop modes.

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ To select the desired track number with the

MULTI JOG knob

Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the TRACK indicator on the

display.

Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise to advance to the next

track and the following tracks or counterclockwise to return to the

previous track and other previous tracks.

■ To advance to the next track

Press r/y (y on the remote control). Press r/y (y on

the remote control) repeatedly to skip to other tracks.

■ To return to the beginning of the track

being played

Press t/e (t on the remote control) once during playback.

■ To return to the previous track

Press t/e (t on the remote control) twice during playback.

Press t/e (t on the remote control) repeatedly to return to

other previous tracks.

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM78

E-79

English

PLAYBACK

NATURAL SOUND HDD

CD RECORDER

REC

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

CDRHDD

MIN MAX

LEVELPHONES

POWER

PLAYBACK

Selecting Tracks Using On-Screen-

Display (OSD)

You can display a list of groups and tracks to be played by

connecting this unit to a monitor. If you display the list on a screen,

it is much easier to see than on the display.

Note

• When “VIDEO Output” on the system utility is set to OFF, no

OSD signals will be output. Set it to ON to have an on-screen-

display (see page 87).

■ Select a group

1. Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the GROUP

indicator.

The following list will be displayed on a monitor.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select a group.

The selected group indicator will be in reverse video.

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ Select a track

1. Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the TRACK

indicator.

The following list will be displayed on a monitor.

2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select a group.

The selected group indicator will be in reverse video.

Note

• The track with a bookmark has *(asterisk) added in front of the

track number.

Listening with Headphones

Connect your headphones to the PHONES jack and adjust the

volume with the LEVEL control.

Caution

• If the power of other components such as an amplifier connected

to this unit is not turned on, the sound of this unit may be

distorted. If this occurs, use the headphones with the other

component’s power turned on.

Adjust the headphones volume

Connect your headphones

TRACK

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Grp Tr. 1 0:00

Dsc 1: AAAAA

Dsc 2: BBBBB

Dsc 3: CCCCC

Alb 1: MY BEST

Alb 2: MY BEST 2

Mark : [Bookmark]

Grp Tr. 9 0:00

1- Aaaaa

2- Bbbbb

3- Ccccc

4- Ddddd

5- Eeeee

6- Fffff

7- Ggggg

8- Hhhhh

9- Iiiii

10- Jjjjj

11- Kkkkk

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM79

E-80

VARIOUS PLAYBACK

This unit provides various playback methods according to the setting. The following steps describe the setting procedure for each setting.

Notes

• The setting of play style, random play, repeat play, and intro play can be set during the playback.

• The setting of play style, random play, and full repeat play is memorized even after the power of this unit has been turned off.

Finding the Desired Passage by Time

(Time Search)

You can search the desired part by setting the time.

1. Press HDD or CDR to select a drive to operate.

2. Press MODE to enter the playback mode setting.

“Time Search” appears on the display.

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The following message appears on the display.

4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to set the time to be searched.

If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts

searching the set time and starts playback from the set time.

Notes

• You can start searching the set time by pressing the MULTI

JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) also.

• You can skip to other tracks by pressing t/e or r/y

(t or y on the remote control). When the track is skipped

to another track, the set time will be reset to “0:00”.

• You can skip to other groups by pressing GROUP SKIP q

or GROUP SKIP w on the remote control. When the group

is skipped to another group, the set time will be reset to

“0:00”.

• You cannot search by pressing t/e or r/y (e or r

on the remote control) during the time search mode.

5. Press MODE to return to the normal playback.

Note

• You cannot search by time during the random play or the intro

play.

Time Search

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

001 1 012

TIME

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Time to be searched

Setting the Play Style

Only when playing sources recorded on the HDD, you can set the

play style. The play style setting changes the range of playback.

1. Press HDD to select the HDD.

2. Press MODE to display the playback mode setting.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Play Style”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to start the play style setting.

5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Style All” or “Style Group”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the selection.

■ When “Style All” is confirmed

The A indicator lights on the display.

Random play, full repeat play, or intro play can be set for one of the

group categories (disc, album, and bookmark) recorded on the

HDD.

Play Style

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Style All

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Style Group

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Disc 1

Disc 2

Album 1

Album 2

Bookmark

Group category for making a

setting

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM80

E-81

English

PLAYBACK

• When random play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected

group category are played in a random sequence.

• When full repeat play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected

group category are repeatedly played.

• When intro play is set, the beginnings of all tracks that belong to

the selected group category are played one after another.

For example, if full repeat play is set during the playback of disc 1,

all tracks recorded to discs 1 and 2 are repeatedly played.

Notes

• If “Style All” is set and the title is shown on the display, the sound

may be missing when this unit switches from one disc to another.

To avoid this problem, switch the display to from the indication of

time by pressing TEXT/TIME (see page 11).

• Select “Style All” when sequentially playing the sources recorded

for long hours extending several discs.

■ When “Style Group” is confirmed

The G indicator lights on the display.

Random play, full repeat play, or intro play can be set for one of the

groups (disc, album, and bookmark) recorded on the HDD.

• When random play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected

group are played in a random sequence.

• When full repeat play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected

group are repeatedly played.

• When intro play is set, the beginnings of all tracks that belong to

the selected group are played one after another.

For example, if full repeat play is set during the playback of disc 1,

all tracks recorded to disc 1 are repeatedly played.

VARIOUS PLAYBACK

Disc 1

Disc 2

Album 1

Album 2

Bookmark

Group for making a setting

Single Repeat Play

You can listen to a single desired track or to a track being played

repeatedly.

■ To set single repeat play

1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used.

2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Repeat”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to start setting single repeat play.

5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Repeat Single”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the selection.

The S REP indicator lights on the display.

Notes

• Single repeat play can be easily set by pressing REPEAT on the

remote control once.

• The track being played is repeatedly played even during playback

of an album or random play.

■ To cancel the single repeat play setting

Select and confirm “Repeat Off” in step 5 for “To set single repeat

play” or press REPEAT on the remote control repeatedly until the

S REP indicator turns off on the display.

Repeat

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Repeat Single

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SREP

S REP

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM81

E-82

Random Play

You can listen to all tracks recorded in a group on the HDD or on a

CD in a random sequence.

■ To set random play

1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used.

2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Random”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to start setting random play.

5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Random On”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the selection.

The RNDM indicator lights on the display.

Notes

• Random play can be easily set by pressing RANDOM on the

remote control.

• If random play is set during playback, the new setting applies to

the next track.

■ To start random play

When random play is set, press w/d (w on the remote control) to

start random play.

■ To stop random play

Press a.

■ To cancel the random play setting

Select and confirm “Random Off” in step 5 for “To set random

play” or press RANDOM on the remote control. The RNDM

indicator turns off on the display.

Full Repeat Play

You can repeatedly listen to all tracks recorded in a group (or a CD)

or group category.

■ To set full repeat play

1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used.

2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Repeat”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to start setting full repeat play.

5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Repeat Full”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the selection.

The REP indicator lights on the display.

Notes

• Full repeat play can be easily set by pressing REPEAT on the

remote control twice.

• The tracks are repeatedly played in the same random order if

played in the random play mode.

■ To cancel the full repeat play setting

Select and confirm “Repeat Off” in step 5 for “To set full repeat

play” or press REPEAT on the remote control repeatedly until the

REP indicator turns off on the display.

Repeat

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Repeat Full

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

GREP

G REP

Random

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Random On

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

RNDM

VARIOUS PLAYBACK

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM82

E-83

English

PLAYBACK

Intro Play

You can listen to the beginnings of the tracks for a set amount of

time one after another.

■ To set intro play

1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used.

2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to display “Intros Scan”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to start setting intro play.

5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to set the amount of time to play the begin-

ning of each track.

The playback time can be set in the 1 to 10 seconds range by 1

second steps and in the 10 seconds to 60 seconds range by 5

seconds steps.

■ To start intro play

After the playback time for intro play has been set in step 5 for “To

set intro play”, press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to confirm the setting or press w/d (w on the remote

control) to start intro play.

Notes

• Intro play can be easily started by pressing INTRO on the remote

control.

• The beginning of the selected track is repeatedly played if single

repeat is set.

• When “Style Group” is set with the full repeat play mode, the

beginnings of all tracks recorded in the selected group are

repeatedly played.

• When “Style All” is set with the full repeat play mode, the

beginnings of all tracks recorded in the selected group category

are repeatedly played.

• The beginnings of randomly selected tracks are played if random

play is set.

■ To stop intro play

Press a.

■ To cancel the intro play setting

Press INTRO on the remote control.

Intros Scan

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Interval: 5

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Bookmark Play

You can easily listen to a group of desired tracks by selecting a list

of tracks with bookmarks.

■ To place a bookmark

Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote

control) during playback of the desired track. Tracks are listed and

stored in order that the bookmarks have been placed.

See “BOOKMARK” on page 59.

■ Start playback of the track with a bookmark

1. Press HDD or CDR to select a drive to operate.

2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to turn on the GROUP indicator on the

display.

3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote

control) to select “Mark”.

4. Start playback.

Playback starts from the beginning of the first track when w/d

(w on the remote control) is pressed.

Note

• Tracks are played in the order that bookmarks have been

placed.

5. To stop playback temporarily, press w/d (d on the

remote control).

To resume playback, press w/d (w or d on the remote control).

Mark 1

MARK

TOC GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Mark 1

MARK

GROUP

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

When selecting “Mark” on a CD

When selecting “Mark” on the HDD

VARIOUS PLAYBACK

109_HD1300(E)76-83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM83

E-84

This unit has a DAC mode function. You can switch the input signals, as an input selector, to output from both the analog and digital jacks to

the amplifier connected to this unit.

DAC (DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTER) MODE

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COPY

A.M.Q.R.

4 455

2,3,45 1,5

OPEN/CLOSE

COPY REC

TEXT/TIME

TRACK NO.

WRITE

MODE MENU

CLEAR

ABC

DEF

GHI

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM NTRO

ENTER

COMPLETE

A.M.Q.R.

FINALIZE

INPUT

TIMER REC

ERASE

JKL

MNO

PQR

STU

VWX

SPACE

SYMBOL

0 +10

BOOKMARK

REPEAT RANDOM

GROUP SKIP

INTRO

HDD CDR

1,5

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “DAC Mode” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to enter the DAC mode.

4. The input source selected by INPUT is output both

from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks and from

the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks.

• When OPTICAL or COAXIAL is selected, the MULTI JOG

knob functions as a volume control.

• When ANALOG is selected, the ANALOG REC LEVEL

control functions as a volume control.

5. Any of the following operation cancel the DAC mode

and start normal operation.

• Press w/d (w on the remote control) to play the drive that had

been selected before entering the DAC mode.

• Press a to set this unit in the stop mode.

• Press COMPLETE to set this unit in the stop mode.

• Press MENU to return to the menu item selection.

DAC Mode

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.7.26, 4:20 PM84

E-85

English

APPENDIX

■ To check the HDD utility (HDD Info.)

You can check the HDD utility (capacity, usage, and available

space) of this unit.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “HDD Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to display “HDD Info.”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) again to display the capacity of the HDD.

Each time the MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote

control is pressed), the display changes as follows. Indications

are made by time.

Note

• The times displayed are rough estimates.

HDD UTILITY

Capacity (total time)

Usage (total used time)

Available space (recordable time)

HDD Utility

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

HDD Info.

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Total 30h40m

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Used 2h 3m

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Avail 28h 9m

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ To format the HDD (HDD Format)

You can format the HDD in this unit.

Cautions

• After the HDD has been formatted, all data about the recorded

tracks and settings will be erased from the HDD.

• After all data on the HDD have been initialized, the undo function

cannot be applied to any editing operations before formatting.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “HDD Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the HDD utility item selection.

4. Select “HDD Format” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. “Initialize ?” appears on the display when the MULTI

JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed.

6. “Format Really” appears on the display to make a

confirmation when w/d (w on the remote control) is

pressed.

If you wish to format the HDD, press INPUT. If not, press a.

7. “Format OK” appears in the display when INPUT is

pressed. Then the display returns to the one when the

power of this unit was turned on.

Caution

• The method explained above cannot be used to format an HDD

newly installed. To format an HDD newly installed, see the

attached instruction.

HDD Format

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Initialize ?

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Format Really

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM85

E-86

SYSTEM UTILITY

■ To check the firmware version

(Firm. Version)

Software that is called “firmware” is built into this unit. This

firmware controls the operation. The following steps describe the

firmware version check procedures.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) to display “Firm. Version”.

4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) again to display the version of the firmware.

The display switches in the order of the system firmware

version ➞ the CDR drive firmware version ➞ type of HDD as

the MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote control is

pressed).

Sys. Utility

dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0

Firm. Version

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

V1.0.00 Jun 2

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

System firmware version

V1.0.00 Jun 2

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

CDR drive firmware version

CDRW 1.0D

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Type of HDD

ABCDEFGHIJKLM

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

■ To initialize the setting for each item

(Initialize)

You can initialize the settings that have been changed. The OPC

data stored in this unit is also initialized.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the system utility item selection.

4. Select “Initialize” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. “Initialize ?” appears on the display if the MULTI JOG

knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed.

6. Press COMPLETE.

The display returns to the one when the power of this unit is

turned on.

Initialize

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Initialize ?

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.7.26, 4:21 PM86

E-87

English

APPENDIX

■ To change the display brightness

(Dimmer Setup)

You can change the brightness of the display.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the system utility item selection.

4. Select “Dimmer Setup” by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the

MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is

pressed.

The selection and the brightness change in 3 levels as the

MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote control is

pressed).

Note

• Initial setting is “Dimmer Bright”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) or COMPLETE.

The display brightness has been set.

Dimmer Setup

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dimmer Bright

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dimmer Bright

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dimmer Mid

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Dimmer Dark

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

SYSTEM UTILITY

■ To set the video output (VIDEO Output)

You can switch the on-screen display output through the VIDEO

OUT jacks on and off.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the system utility item selection.

4. Select “VIDEO Output” by rotating the MULTI JOG

knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the

MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is

pressed.

Switch “VIDEO On” and “VIDEO Off” by rotating the MULTI

JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

Note

• Initial setting is “VIDEO On”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) or COMPLETE.

The on-screen display output is set to on or off.

Note

• If “VIDEO Off” is selected, the video circuit inside this unit is

also turned off. You can enjoy the playback or recording in higher

quality sound.

VIDEO Output

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

VIDEO On

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM87

E-88

SYSTEM UTILITY

■ To set auto play (Auto Play)

You can set the auto play function which automatically starts

playback when the power of this unit is turned on.

1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode.

The display changes for the menu item selection.

2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control).

The display changes for the system utility item selection.

4. Select “Auto Play” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob

(pressing +/– on the remote control).

5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the

MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is

pressed.

Switch “Auto Play On” and “Auto Play Off” by rotating the

MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control).

Note

• Initial setting is “Auto Play Off”.

6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote

control) or COMPLETE.

The auto play function is set to on or off.

If the auto play function is set to on, the setting will be applied

when the power of this unit is turned on the next time.

• This unit plays data on the drive that had been last selected

when the power of this unit was last turned off.

• This unit plays in the playback mode (such as random play)

that had been last set when the power of this unit was last

turned off.

Note

• The setting for the timer recording takes precedence over the

setting for the auto play function. If the timer recording is set, this

unit starts recording when the power of this unit is turned on the

next time even when “Auto Play On” is selected. See page 22 for

the timer recording.

■ To update the firmware version

(Firm. Update)

This menu is prepared for the expansion of the functions in the

future.

Auto Play

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

Auto Play Off

dB –30 –10 –6 –20

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM88

E-89

English

APPENDIX

You can display the list of groups or tracks to be played, copying/recording settings and the list of the setting items on the monitor by

connecting the monitor to this unit.

■ List of groups or tracks

The numbers and titles of groups, or the numbers and titles of

tracks are displayed. Press the MULTI JOG knob to switch the list

displayed.

■ Display during copying

The settings for copying are displayed.

■ Display during recording

The setting for recording are displayed.

ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD)

Example: when copying from a CD to the HDD

Example: when recording to the HDD

■ List of setting items

The names of items to be set are displayed.

■ Display during titling

This is displayed while the title is being assigned to albums, tracks,

or discs.

Grp Tr. 1 0:00

Dsc 1: AAAAA

Dsc 2: BBBBB

Dsc 3: CCCCC

Alb 1: MY BEST

Alb 2: MY BEST 2

Mark : [Bookmark]

Grp Tr. 9 0:00

1- Aaaaa

2- Bbbbb

3- Ccccc

4- Ddddd

5- Eeeee

6- Fffff

7- Ggggg

8- Hhhhh

9- Iiiii

10- Jjjjj

11- Kkkkk

≥ Copy

Mode : All Synchro

Level : 0.0dB

Method : Digital Copy

Speed : Best Effort

Dsc003… 1π 1 0:00

Rec

Mode : Track Synchro

Level : 0.0dB

Input : OPTICAL

Dsc003… 1 0:00

Example: when setting the menu

Album Edit

Track Edit

Disc Edit

Undo

HDD Utility

Sys. Utility

Synchro Setup

DAC Mode

Example: when titling the track

Dsc 3 Tr. 1

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX

YZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuv

wxyz0123456789!"#$&%'()*

+,-./:;<=>?@[÷]^å {|}`

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.7.26, 4:22 PM89

E-90

DISPLAY MESSAGES

Can’t Copy

This message is displayed for approximately 3 seconds when digital

recording or copying is not possible according to the SCMS

standard.

See “Rules of Digital Recording” on page 5.

Can’t Edit

This message is displayed when a prohibited editing operation has

been attempted.

Can’t Tr.Lev.

The album with its tracks’ level adjusted is to be copied to a CD-R

disc in the Audio Master Quality Recording mode.

Can’t use HDD

The loaded HDD has been formatted by other CDR-HD1300s.

Reformat by the CDR-HD1300 on which you plan to use that HDD,

following the instruction on page 85.

Change Discs!

This message informs that a CD needs to be changed to a disc to be

used for duplicating when copying from a CD onto the HDD has

been completed.

Check Disc

This unit fails to read the CD because the CD has been loaded on

the disc tray upside down or the CD has remarkable scratch on it, or

some kind of error has been occurred during operation. Check the

disc, and exchange the CD if necessary.

Data Track

This message is displayed when the data track is being played.

Disc Full

This message is displayed when recording to a CD-R or CD-RW

disc cannot be performed any further because the recording has

been made up to the total recordable time.

Disc No.Full

When the number of discs recorded on the HDD has reached its

maximum of 999 discs, this message is displayed if more discs have

been attempted to be added.

Drive Check

Some kind of error has been occurred in the HDD or the CDR

drive. Contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service

center. Or HDD is not set to “slave” precisely. Refer to the attached

instruction and set the HDD to “slave”.

Erasing

Erasing a CD-RW disc is being performed. The erasing progress is

indicated by the level meter.

Finalize OK?

This message confirms starting the finalization of a CD-R or CD-

RW disc. If you wish to finalize, press w/d (w on the remote

control).

Finalizing

Finalization is being performed. The finalization progress is

indicated by the level meter.

Format Really

This message confirms starting the format of the HDD after

“Initialize ?” appears.

HDD Full

This message is displayed when recording to the HDD cannot be

performed any further because the recording has been made up to

the total recordable time.

Initialize ?

This message confirms starting the format of the HDD, or the

initialization of each item.

Invalid Mode

The recording mode that cannot be selected during the timer

recording setting has been selected.

New Disc

The disc in the disc tray is either a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a

CD-RW disc that has been erased by using a Disc Erase or All

Erase.

No Data

There are no tracks (data) recorded on the HDD.

No Disc

There are no CDs on the disc tray.

No Enough Spc

There is not enough space for copying, or the track number exceeds

the maximum number when copying.

No Input

There are no input signals when attempting the recording from the

external components digitally.

No Previous

When making “Tr. Interval” on the ALBUM EDITING menu or

“Track Adjust” on the TRACK EDITING menu, there is no track

before the track to be edited.

No Source

There is no source recorded on the HDD or CDs when copying.

Not Audio

A non-audio CD-R or CD-RW disc, such as a CD-R or CD-RW

disc for PCs, has been loaded in the disc tray, and recording has

been attempted on that CD-R or CD-RW disc.

No Undo data

Undo is not possible.

OPC Adjust

This message is displayed while OPC (Optimum Power Calibra-

tion) optimized the laser power to the reflectivity of the disc.

Approximately 15 seconds may be required to complete this

automatic adjustment. However, this time length may change

according to the type of the disc that has been loaded.

Pack Before !

This message is displayed when the editing operation cannot be

done unless “Pack” is performed.

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM90

E-91

English

APPENDIX

Reading

This unit reads the format of the CD, CD-R, or CD-RW disc loaded

on the disc tray. Approximately 15 seconds may be required to

complete this automatic adjustment. However, this time length may

change according to the type of the CD, CD-R, or CD-RW disc that

has been loaded.

Slow Fnlz OK?

This message confirms starting the slow finalization of a CD-R or

CD-RW disc. If you wish to finalize, press w/d (w on the remote

control).

Standby

This message is displayed for several seconds after REC has been

pressed to record on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

TEXT Save?

This message is displayed when the disc tray has been attempted to

be opened without performing finalization after copying the data

including the titles (disc title, track title, and album title) to a CD-R

or CD-RW disc.

Timer Standby

This message is displayed after the timer recording setting has been

completed, or displayed for approximate 5 seconds before the timer

recording starts.

Track No.Full

One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. Recording is attempted on the

disc that has reached the maximum number.

Unavailable

The CD-R disc whose recordable time is other than 74 minutes or

79 minutes or the CD-R disc which does not support 4x writing, or

the CD-RW disc has been loaded when copying in the Audio

Master Quality Recording mode.

Unrecordable

In recording or copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the disc

cannot be used for recording or copying. Or in recording or copying

onto the HDD, no space is available.

Wait

This message flashes while this unit is writing information to the

PMA (program Memory Area) after a is pressed in recording onto

a CD-R or CD-RW disc, or flashes while processing the data on the

HDD or detecting the loaded HDD when this unit is turned on.

DISPLAY MESSAGES

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM91

E-92

SYMPTOM

This unit does not turn on

when POWER is pressed.

Playback does not begin

with the CD loaded.

Playback is delayed, or

begins at the wrong place.

Recording/copying is not

possible.

Some vibration and rotation

noise are created during the

copying.

Continuous recording

cannot be made on a disc on

the HDD beyond 100

minutes.

The beginning of the track

is missing during the

playback when this unit is

connected digitally to an

amplifier.

The sound is missing when

this unit switches one disc

to another.

A CD-R or CD-RW that has

been recorded with this unit

cannot be played on the

other CD player or DVD

player.

Sound “skips”.

This unit makes noise.

If this unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures

suggested. If they cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for assistance.

CAUSE

The power cable is not completely connected.

There is moisture on the laser pick-up.

The CD has been loaded upside down.

The CD is dirty.

The CD may be scratched or damaged.

The CD-R or CD-RW disc has been finalized.

The CD-R or CD-RW disc that has completed

recording is loaded.

INPUT is not correctly set.

Further digital recording or copying has been

attempted from the digitally copied sources.

There is not enough available space left or 99

tracks have already been recorded on the disc.

There is no available space on the HDD.

If the power cable was unplugged or there

was a power outage during recording, the

recorded material may be lost.

The CD-R or CD-RW disc is dirty or

damaged.

The HDD is not installed properly.

This unit copies by rotating the CD, CD-R or

CD-RW disc at high speed.

The maximum recordable time for a disc on

the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds.

The tracks that have different emphases have

been played.

The titles appear on the display during the

playback of the part that has been recorded

stretching over the two discs.

Your CD or DVD player is not compatible

with CD-R or CD-RW discs.

The CD-R or CD-RW disc has not been

finalized.

This unit and/or the component connected is

being subjected to vibration or impact.

The CD is dirty.

Connection has not correctly been made.

REMEDY

Securely connect the power cable.

Turn the power of this unit and wait 20 to 30 minutes

before trying to play.

Reload the CD with the label side facing up.

Clean the CD.

Check the CD carefully. Replace it if necessary.

Load a recordable CD that has not been finalized yet.

Load a recordable CD.

Set INPUT to the correct position according to the input

signal.

Switch to ANALOG to make a recording.

Load a recordable disc (for a CD-R or CD-RW disc).

Select the other discs (for the HDD).

Erase the space not being used to create available space on

the HDD for further recording.

If the recording of a CD-RW disc is interrupted, try

recording again from the beginning. When the recording of

a CD-R disc is interrupted, start recording over again with

a disc that can be recorded on.

Clean or replace the CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Install the HDD properly following the attached instruc-

tion.

Lower the copying speed to decrease vibration and rotation

noise.

Regardless of the recording mode, the recording will be

performed continuously to the next available disc after the

recording has been performed to one disc for its maximum

length.

Connect to the amplifier using the ANALOG LINE OUT

(PLAY) jacks.

Press TEXT/TIME to switch the display to the indication

of time.

Use a CD or DVD player compatible with CD-R or CD-

RW discs.

Finalize the CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Relocate the unit. (This is not possible if the skipping

sound is already on the recording due to vibrations or

impact that occurred during recording.)

Clean the CD.

Properly connect the audio pin cables. Replace the audio

cables.

TROUBLESHOOTING

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM92

E-93

English

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTING

SYMPTOM

This unit does not operate

properly.

There is rotation noise of

the fan.

A noise occurs at the

change of the tracks that

has been recorded from the

analog record and edited.

Remote control does not

work.

TV does not correctly

function when the remote

control is being used.

The picture on the TV is

impaired.

The HDD cannot be

selected.

“Drive Check” appears on

the display.

CAUSE

The internal microcomputer has been frozen.

The temperature inside this unit rises.

A very low frequency component among the

wow and flutter of the analog record is being

output as a noise.

The batteries of the remote control are too

weak.

Remote control is from too far.

Remote control is being used at an incorrect

angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type

of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the

remote control sensor.

Remote control is being used near TV set

with a remote control sensor.

The indoor antenna is used.

The HDD is not installed properly.

The HDD newly installed is not formatted on

CDR-HD1300 you plan to use that HDD

with.

The HDD is not set to “slave” properly.

REMEDY

Turn off the power of this unit and then turn on again after

about one minute.

The fan starts to rotate to cool off the temperature inside

this unit.

Improvement can be made by adding a short fade-in or

fade-out to the track.

Replace 2 batteries with new ones.

Use the remote control within 6m and 60 degrees radius.

Change the position so that the remote control sensor is not

exposed to strong lighting.

Relocate this unit away from the TV or cover the TV’s

remote control sensor.

Use an outdoor antenna, or set this unit away from the TV

set.

Install the HDD properly following the attached instruc-

tion.

Format it on CDR-HD1300 you plan to use with.

Set the HDD to “slave” properly following the instruction

on the HDD.

ABOUT PRODUCT INFORMATIONS

YAMAHA Audio and Video website contain the latest product information, etc. Refer to the website to check the latest information.

YAMAHA Audio and Video website:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/av/

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM93

E-94

■ Audio Performance

Frequency response .................................... 5 to 20,000 Hz, ±0.5 dB

S/N ratio (EIAJ)

Playback ......................................................................... 105 dB

Recording ......................................................................... 92 dB

Total harmonic distortion (1 kHz)

Playback ........................................................................ 0.004 %

Recording ...................................................................... 0.006 %

Dynamic range

Playback ........................................................................... 99 dB

Recording ......................................................................... 92 dB

■ Laser Diode Properties

Material ................................................................................ GaAIAs

Wavelength ................................................................. 780 to 787 nm

Pulse Durations and Max. Output at the lens of the Laser Pickup

Unit

Read Mode ............................................ 0.85 mW (Continuous)

Write Mode

.......................... Max. 48 mW (for 212 ns, Min. Cycle 57.9 ns)

■ Inputs

ANALOG LINE IN (REC)

Type ............................................................................... Pin jack

Standard input level ............................................ 500 mV/24 kΩ

DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL)

Type ............................................. Square optical connector jack

DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL)

Type ........................................................................ Coaxial jack

Standard input level .......................................... 0.5 Vp-p (75 Ω)

■ Outputs

ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY)

Type ............................................................................... Pin jack

Standard output level (1 kHz, 0 dB) ..................... 2.0±0.5 Vrms

DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL)

Type ............................................. Square optical connector jack

DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)

Type ........................................................................ Coaxial jack

Standard output level ........................................ 0.5 Vp-p (75 Ω)

PHONES

Standard output level (Input 150 Ω shorted, –20 dB)

............................................................................ 300 mV/150 Ω

■ General

Power supply

[U.S.A. model] ................................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ............................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power consumption .................................................................. 37 W

Operating environment

Temperature .............................................................. +5 to 35°C

Humidity .............................. 30 to 90 % RH (No condensation)

Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 115.5 x 414.5 mm

(17-1/8” x 4-1/2” x 16-5/16”)

Weight ............................................. 8.4 kg (18 lbs. 8 oz.) with HDD

7.8 kg (17 lbs. 3 oz.) with no HDD

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SPECIFICATIONS

110_HD1300(E)84-94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM94

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

LINE IN — LINE OUT IN OUT

DIGITAL

REC COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL OPTICAL

RS–232C

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

ANALOG

PLAY

4 3

VARO!

AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA

OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE

LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

VARNING!

OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR

ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.

BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified herein may

result in hazardous radiation exposure.

ATTENTION

L’emploi de commandes, de réglages ou un choix de

procédures différents des spécifications de cette

brochure peut entraîner une exposition à d’éventuelles

radiations pouvant être dangereses.

ACHTUNG

Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen oder

Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von

Bedienungsvorgängen, die nicht in dieser Anleitung

aufgeführt sind, kann zu einem Kontakt mit

gefährlichen Laserstrahlen führen.

OBSERVERA

Användning av kontroller och justeringar eller

genomförande av procedurer andra än de som

specificeras i denna bok kan resultera i att du utsätter

dig för farlig strålning.

ATTENZIONE

Uso di controlli o regolazioni o procedure non

specificamente descritte può causare l’esposizione a

radiazioni di livello pericoloso.

PRECAUCIÓN

El uso de los controles o los procedimientos de ajuste

o utilización diferentes de los especificados en este

manual pueden causar una exposición peligrosa a la

radiación.

VOORZICHTIG

Gebruik van bedieningsorganen of instellingen, of

uitvoeren van handelingen anders dan staan

beschreven in deze handleiding kunnen leiden tot

blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen.

(For U.S.A. model)

(For U.K. and Europe models)

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPART

PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1

CAUTION - VISIBLE AND

OR INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.

AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VARNING - SYNLIG OCH

ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA

DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.

VARNING - SYNLIG OCH

ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL

ÄR ÖPPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.

VARO !

AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA

TAI

NÄKYMÄTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

VORSICHT !

SICHTBARE UND

ODER UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG

WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

ATTENTION -

RADIATION VISIBLE ET / OU INVISIBLE LORSQUE L'ALLAREIL

EST OUVERT. EVITEZ TOUTE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.

Caution.H3 02.6.28, 9:48 AM1

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia V956620-1

UAB

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

CDR-HD1300

CDR-HD1300E

HDD/CD Recorder

Enregistreur CD/Disque Dur

CDR-HD1300/CDR-HD1300E

TEXT/TIME MODE

MULTI JOG

DIGITAL REC LEVEL

PUSH ENTER

TRACK NO.

FINALIZE ERASE

BOOKMARK

COMPLETE

CLEAR

MIN MAX

OPTICAL

ANALOG REC LEVEL

INPUT

REC

COAXIAL

ANALOG

000_HD1300(CA)H14_(7.5mm) 02.7.26, 4:33 PM2

CDR-HD1300

CDR-HD1300E

HDD Installation Manual

Manuel d’installation du disque dur

Festplattenspeicher-Installationshandbuch

Hårddiskinstallationsanvisningar

Manuale d’installazione dell’HDD

Manual de instalación del disco duro

Installatiehandleiding voor de harde schijf

999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 02.6.28, 9:19 AM1

E-1

■ Required specifications of the HDD

Interface .................................................................... IDE/ATA type

Data Transfer Mode ........................................ PIO mode 0 to 4 and

Multi-word DMA mode 0 to 2 compatible

Size ............................................................................. 3.5-inch type

Capacity ..................................................................... 20 to 137 GB

■ Installation procedures

Before installation

• Turn off the power of this unit and unplug the AC power

cable from the wall outlet.

• Disconnect all the connections.

• Set the HDD to SLAVE (see description below).

MASTER or SLAVE setting on the HDD

It is necessary to set the HDD to MASTER or SLAVE when

connecting the HDD to the component you plan to use. This

unit is designed to operate HDD when it is set to SLAVE.

Usually, setting procedure is written on the HDD itself.

INSTALLING THE HDD

There are some models that do not have a built-in hard disk drive (HDD) depending on the sales location. Please purchase a commercially

available HDD for internal use and install it on this unit correctly, referring to the instruction below.

1. Loosen the two fixing screws on the HDD slot door

and open the HDD slot door.

2. Pull out the HDD tray.

• Be careful not to hook the IDE cable and the power cable

over the HDD tray.

• Do not apply the excessive force on the HDD tray.

3. Place the HDD on the HDD tray.

• HDD is a very sensitive device. Be careful not to give any

shock to it.

4. Tighten the four fixing screws.

Fixing screws

Example: When setting the WD800AB model

The HDD is set to slave by setting the plastic shunt at the second

position from right of the jumper switch.

Plastic shunt

Fixing screws

(Screws are on the opposite side)

Example: When setting the ST340810A model

The HDD is set to slave by setting no plastic shunt at any

position of the jumper switch.

999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 02.6.28, 9:19 AM2

■ Formatting the HDD

If you install a new HDD, you need to format the HDD before

using with this unit.

1. Connect the AC power cable to the wall outlet and

turn on the power of this unit.

“Format Start?” appears on the display.

2. Press w/d.

“Format Really” appears on the display.

3. Press w/d.

“Push PLAY KEY” appears on the display.

4. Press w/d.

“Wait” flashes on the display. After a few seconds, this unit

starts formatting of the HDD. It takes approximately 15

seconds to complete formatting.

5. When formatting has been completed, “Format OK”

appears on the display. Then the display returns to

the one when the power of this unit was turned on.

Note

• Formatting is not necessary for the HDD that has been formatted

on CDR-HD1300 you use. However, you need to format the HDD

that has been formatted on other CDR-HD1300s following the

steps on page 83 of the owner’s manual.

■ Recommended HDDs

Following HDDs have been proved by YAMAHA for their

compatibility with CDR-HD1300 (as of June, 2002).

*You can find the information about the recommended HDD at the

YAMAHA Audio and Video website:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/av/

*Company names and product names refered in this instruction are

trademarks of their respective companies.

E-2

■ Installation procedures (continued)

5. Push the HDD tray and connect the IDE cable and the

power cable.

• Make sure that the terminals and connectors are in the correct

direction, and connect the cables securely.

• Static electricity can damage the HDD. Be careful not to

touch the terminal pins and the circuit board.

• Do not apply excessive force on the HDD tray.

6. Close the HDD slot door and tighten the two fixing

screws on the HDD slot door.

Series/Model No.

U6 Series/ST340810A

U6CE Series/

ST340810ACE

BARRACUDA ATA IV

Series/ST380021A

Caviar Series/WD800AB

IDE cable

Power cable

Manufacturers

Seagate

Western Digital

Capacity

40 GB

80 GB

Fixing screws

English

999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 02.6.28, 9:19 AM3

Printed in Malaysia WA08420

999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 02.6.28, 9:19 AM16

Documenttranscriptie

UAB CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 ACHTUNG Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen oder Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von Bedienungsvorgängen, die nicht in dieser Anleitung aufgeführt sind, kann zu einem Kontakt mit gefährlichen Laserstrahlen führen. CDR-HD1300 ATTENTION L’emploi de commandes, de réglages ou un choix de procédures différents des spécifications de cette brochure peut entraîner une exposition à d’éventuelles radiations pouvant être dangereses. VIDEO OUT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 S VIDEO VIDEO L L R R 4 REC PLAY 3 COAXIAL LINE IN — LINE OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL IN OPTICAL RS–232C OUT ANALOG DIGITAL (For U.S.A. model) CDR-HD1300 CDR-HD1300E CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 OBSERVERA Användning av kontroller och justeringar eller genomförande av procedurer andra än de som specificeras i denna bok kan resultera i att du utsätter dig för farlig strålning. HDD/CD Recorder Enregistreur CD/Disque Dur VIDEO OUT S VIDEO ATTENZIONE Uso di controlli o regolazioni o procedure non specificamente descritte può causare l’esposizione a radiazioni di livello pericoloso. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 VIDEO L L R 4 R REC PLAY 3 LINE IN — LINE OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL IN ANALOG OPTICAL OUT RS–232C DIGITAL (For U.K. and Europe models) PRECAUCIÓN El uso de los controles o los procedimientos de ajuste o utilización diferentes de los especificados en este manual pueden causar una exposición peligrosa a la radiación. CAUTION - VISIBLE AND / OR INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. VARNING - SYNLIG OCH / ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. VARO ! VOORZICHTIG Gebruik van bedieningsorganen of instellingen, of uitvoeren van handelingen anders dan staan beschreven in deze handleiding kunnen leiden tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen. VARNING MULTI JOG PUSH ENTER AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA / TAI NÄKYMÄTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR - SYNLIG OCH / ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. VORSICHT ! SICHTBARE UND / ODER UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. ATTENTION - RADIATION VISIBLE ET / OU INVISIBLE LORSQUE L'ALLAREIL EST OUVERT. EVITEZ TOUTE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL VARO! AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX VARNING! OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 000_HD1300(CA)H14_(7.5mm) 2 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia V956620 02.6.26, 10:01 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. IMPORTANT! Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. Model: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. 100_HD1300(E)Caut 2 Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 02.6.24, 6:51 PM FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 100_HD1300(E)Caut 3 02.6.24, 6:51 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT • To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. • Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/ or cold. Avoid ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm on the back of this unit. • Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. • Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. • Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do NOT place: • Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. • Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. • Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. • Do not cover the rear panel of this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. • Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. • Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. • Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. • When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. • Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. • Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. • To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. • Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. • When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. • Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. • Before moving this unit, first check that there is no disc in the disc tray. Finally, press POWER to turn off this unit, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. Laser component in this product is capable of emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR U.K. MODEL IMPORTANT The wires in this mains lead are coloures in accordance with the following code: GREEN-and-YELLOW:Earth BLUE:Neutral BROWN:Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-and YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described above. Note: The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. For Canadian Customers To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES– 003. i 100_HD1300(E)Caut 4 02.6.26, 6:05 PM Hard Disk Drive (HDD) ■ Before using • If you purchase CDR-HD1300; this model is not equipped with a hard disk drive (HDD). Please purchase a commercially available HDD for internal use and install it on this unit correctly, following the attached instruction. • It is necessary to format a new HDD after installation. Also refer the attached instruction for formatting. • If you purchase CDR-HD1300E; this model is equipped with an HDD. ■ Capacity of the HDD Following table shows the total recordable time for different capacities of an HDD. Capacity Total recordable time 20 GB 40 GB 60 GB 80 GB Approx. 30 hours Approx. 60 hours Approx. 90 hours Approx. 120 hours ■ Handling of the HDD • The HDD formatted on your CDR-HD1300 cannot be used on other CDR-HD1300s for any reading or writing. If you wish to use the HDD that has been formatted on other CDR-HD1300 on yours, format it again on your CDR-HD1300. See page 85 for formatting. • Carefully handle an HDD before installation because it is a precision device. Also do not give vibration or shock to this unit after the HDD is installed. Incorrect operation can damage the HDD and/or the data written onto the HDD. • Yamaha and suppliers accept no liability for the loss and/or damage of data caused by vibration and/or shock. ■ CD player mode This unit does not make any recordings if no HDD is installed. In this case, only reading of a CD, CD-R, and CD-RW disc is possible. Permit some time until this unit becomes ready after the power is turned if no HDD is installed. 101_HD1300(E)Caut02 3 02.6.26, 6:06 PM English ii About This Manual ■ Structure ■ About this manual This owner’s manual is composed of following sections. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. • Some of the illustrations and names of the package contents etc written in this manual may differ from the actual products and the names written on the package etc. GETTING STARTED This section explains necessary preparations such as remote control and connection. Please read this before using this unit. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD This section describes basic operations; copying from a CD to the HDD and recording from an external component connected to this unit to the HDD. Additional functions and operations are explained in “Advanced Operations” following this basic operation. Skip this part, if you wish to try to use all the basic functions equipped on this unit. EDITING This section describes how to edit the data copied and/or written on the HDD. Editing method is explained for “album”, “track”, and “disc” respectively. See “EDITING MENU ITEMS” for outline of the editing menu. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC This section describes basic operations; copying from the HDD to a CD-R or CD-RW and recording from an external component connected to this unit to a CD-R or CD-RW. Additional functions and operations are explained in “Advanced Operations” following these basic operations. Skip this part, if you wish to try to use all the basic functions equipped on this unit. DUPLICATION OF A CD This section describes how to duplicate a whole CD. PLAYBACK This section describes how to play the data copied/written on the HDD, your original CDs that are made using this unit, or commercially available CDs. APPENDIX This section provides you with the information about system setting of this unit and troubleshooting. Features • • • • • Copying a CD to the HDD at maximum 10x speed Copying data on the HDD to a CD-R disc at maximum 8x speed Copying data on the HDD to a CD-RW disc at maximum 4x speed High quality recording by the Audio Master Quality Recording (copying from the HDD to a CD-R only) Long-hour-recording useful for recording satellite broadcasting programs and timer recording using an external timer iii 101_HD1300(E)Caut02 4 02.6.26, 6:07 PM Contents GETTING STARTED DUPLICATION OF A CD SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ............................................ 2 CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT ........ 3 RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON SYSTEM ...................................................................... 5 Rules of Digital Recording .................................................... 5 Notes on System .................................................................... 5 Data on the HDD ................................................................... 6 NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS ...................... 7 Front Panel ............................................................................. 7 Remote Control ..................................................................... 8 Display ................................................................................. 10 Display Information ............................................................. 11 Rear Panel ............................................................................ 12 CONNECTIONS ............................................................ 12 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD ..................... 14 Copying All Tracks on a CD ............................................... 14 Copying Favorite Tracks on the CD .................................... 16 Advanced Operations .......................................................... 17 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD ........................................................ 20 Recording from the Digital Components ............................ 20 Recording from the Analog Components ............................ 21 Recording Using an External Timer .................................... 22 Adjusting the Recording Level ............................................ 24 Advanced Operations .......................................................... 25 EDITING EDITING MENU ITEMS ................................................. 29 ALBUM EDITING .......................................................... 30 Album Editing Operation .................................................... 30 TRACK EDITING ........................................................... 39 Track Editing Operation ...................................................... 39 DISC EDITING ............................................................... 52 Disc Editing Operation ........................................................ 52 UNDO FUNCTION ......................................................... 58 BOOKMARK ................................................................. 59 DUPLICATION OF A CD ............................................... 72 High Quality Duplication .................................................... 74 PLAYBACK PLAYBACK .................................................................... 76 Playing a CD ........................................................................ 76 Playing Tracks on the HDD ................................................. 76 Finding the Desired Passage (Search) ................................. 77 Finding the Desired Group (Group Skip) ............................ 77 Finding the Desired Track (Track Skip) .............................. 78 Selecting Tracks Using On-Screen-Display (OSD) ............ 79 Listening with Headphones ................................................. 79 VARIOUS PLAYBACK .................................................. 80 Finding the Desired Passage by Time (Time Search) .......... 80 Setting the Play Style ........................................................... 80 Single Repeat Play ............................................................... 81 Full Repeat Play .................................................................. 82 Random Play ....................................................................... 82 Intro Play ............................................................................. 83 Bookmark Play .................................................................... 83 APPENDIX DAC (DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTER) MODE .......... HDD UTILITY ................................................................. SYSTEM UTILITY .......................................................... ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) ...................................... DISPLAY MESSAGES ................................................... TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................... ABOUT PRODUCT INFORMATIONS ........................... SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................... 84 85 86 89 90 92 93 94 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC ........................................................................... 60 Copying a Whole Group (Disc, Album or Bookmark) ........ 60 Copying Favorite Tracks on the HDD ................................. 62 High Quality Copying ......................................................... 63 Advanced Operations .......................................................... 64 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC .............................. 67 Advanced Operations .......................................................... 69 FINALIZATION .............................................................. 70 ERASING A CD-RW DISC ............................................ 71 102_HD1300(E)01-13 1 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-1 SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES Make sure the following items are included in your package. • Remote Control • Batteries (size AA, UM-3, or R6) (2) OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE REC ERASE • Audio Pin Cables (2) TRACK NO. WRITE MENU COMPLETE CLEAR ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO • Optical Cable GROUP SKIP HDD CDR • Video Pin Cable • Power Cable (for U.S.A. model) • Coaxial Cable (for U.S.A. model) E-2 102_HD1300(E)01-13 2 02.6.24, 6:51 PM CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT ■ Discs that can be used for recording on this unit FOR CONSUMER FOR CONSUMER USE FOR MUSIC USE ONLY ■ Discs that can be used for recording • CD-R discs can only be recorded on once, and the recorded material cannot be erased. • CD-RW discs can be recorded on, have the recorded material erased, and then recorded on again any number of times. ■ Discs that cannot be used for recording on this unit • Discs bearing marks other than those shown above. • Discs intended for recording computer data. • Discs intended for professional use or labeled “FOR PROFESSIONAL USE ONLY”. ■ 79-minute CD-R disc The actual recordable time of the CD-R disc with “80” written on its package is 79 minutes 57 seconds. This manual describes such CD-R disc as “79-minute CD-R disc”. ■ Finalization of CD-R/CD-RW discs To play back CD-R discs on a standard CD player and CD-RW discs on CD-RW-compatible players, you need to perform the process known as “finalization”. In the finalization process, the Table of Contents (TOC) is written onto the discs. In addition to CD-R and CD-RW digital audio discs described above, commercially available pre-recorded CDs bearing the marks shown below can also be played on this unit. Caution • If you use the CDs that do not meet the CD standards, this unit may not operate properly. GETTING STARTED Be sure to use only CD-R and CD-RW discs made by reliable manufacturers. CD-R and CD-RW digital audio discs that display either of the following marks can be used with this unit. ■ Discs that can be played back ■ Playback of the CD-R disc copied with the Audio Master Quality Recording mode The Audio Master Quality Recording mode enables you to create a CD with high quality sounds by increasing the linear velocity when copying. The CD-R discs copied with this mode meet the CD standards and can be played on a standard CD player. However, some CD recorders may not play back these CD-R discs properly. ■ Playback on DVD players Before playing back a finalized CD-R or CD-RW discs on a DVD player, please check whether the DVD player is compatible with CD-R or CD-RW discs or not. Refer to the owner’s manual of the DVD player for more information. CD-R or CD-RW discs cannot be played on a DVD player that is not compatible with CD-R or CD-RW discs. IMPORTANT • Please check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyright material may infringe copyright laws. Finalized CD-R discs • CD-R discs can be played on a standard CD player. • Further recording onto CD-R discs is not possible. • Some CD players may not play back the finalized CD-R discs properly due to differences in the playback system of different manufacturers. Finalized CD-RW discs • CD-RW discs cannot be played on a standard CD player. CD-RW discs can be played back on CD-RW-compatible players such as this unit. • Tracks written on CD-RW discs can be erased, and additional tracks can be recorded after the TOC has been erased. ■ Erasure or loss of data Yamaha and suppliers accept no liability for the loss of data written on the HDD and CD-R or CD-RW discs, or any problems caused as a result of using this unit. As a precaution, it is recommended that the discs are tested after they have been recorded on. Furthermore, under no circumstances do Yamaha and suppliers guarantee the reliability of the discs. 102_HD1300(E)01-13 3 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-3 CD/CD-R/CD-RW COMPATIBLE WITH THIS UNIT ■ Handling of discs ■ To prevent a malfunction of this unit Heed the following notes on handling of discs not to create any cause for a recording failure, a loss of the recorded data, or a malfunction of this unit. • Do not use any non-standard shaped CDs (heart, flower shaped, etc.) available on the market, because they are off-balance in their weight. If a non-standard shaped CD is loaded into this unit, it may create problems such as improper playback, opening the disc tray, creating an usual noise, and this unit’s failure. • This compact disc recorder is designed for use with CDs (including 8cm [3”] discs) bearing the , , , or marks only. Never attempt to load any other type of disc into this unit. • CDs are not subjected to wear during play. However if the disc is handled improperly, damage may be created on the disc to adversely affect the disc’s play. • When writing on the label side of CD-R or CD-RW discs, use an oil-based felt-tipped pen. • Do not use cleaning discs or warped discs. All of these could damage this unit. • Although playback of CDs is generally not affected by small particles of dust or fingerprints on their playing surface, dust, fingerprints, small scratches and direct sunlight on the recording surface of a CD-R or CD-RW disc may make recording impossible. Therefore, for optimal performance of the recorder and for long-term enjoyment of your CD collection, handle discs correctly as outlined in the following guidelines. 1. Hold discs by touching only the edges or center hole. 2. When a disc is not currently being used, remove it from the recorder and store in an appropriate case. 3. With proper disc maintenance, cleaning should not be necessary. However, should cleaning be required, wipe by using a clean, dry cloth. Do not wipe with a circular motion; wipe straight outward from the center. • Be sure to use a felt-tip pen or similar writing tool when writing on the label side of the disc. Do not use a ball-point pen, pencil, or other hard-tipped writing tool, as these may damage the disc and may adversely affect further recording on the disc. • Do not use the discs with glue left on their surface. It may get stuck in this unit or create damage to this unit. • When using an 8cm (3”) disc, do not place a normal 12cm (5”) disc on top of it. • Do not use the discs printed with commercially available label printers. • Do not try to clean the disc’s surface by using any type of disc cleaner, record spray, antistatic spray or liquid, or any other chemical-based liquid, because such substances might irreparably damage the disc’s surface. • Do not expose discs to direct sunlight, high temperature, or high humidity for a long period of time, because this might warp or otherwise damage the disc. No! E-4 102_HD1300(E)01-13 4 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON SYSTEM Notes on System ■ SCMS—Serial Copy Management System ■ Number of recordable discs and tracks and their length As a digital audio component, this unit conforms with the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS) standards. The Serial Copy Management System restricts copies made by recording digital signals to first-generation copies only. The digital program sources that have been recorded cannot be digitally recorded again. There are 2 rules as follows: Rule 1 Digital sources such as commercially available CDs can be copied digitally onto other recordable digital media with this unit (a firstgeneration digital copy). However, the first-generation digital copy cannot be copied digitally any further. Rule 2 The source that was recorded via the ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks can be copied digitally onto other recordable digital media (a first-generation digital copy). However, the first-generation digital copy cannot be copied digitally any further. This unit monitors the SCMS status for each track when a digital recording is made. If the track is protected from digital recording and copying, it is not possible to make a digital recording and copy of that track. The SCMS standard does not apply to analog recording and copying. When making a copy from a CD onto the HDD, or from the HDD onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, any of the copy methods described below can be selected. The following selections are contained in “Copy Method”. • “Auto Dig/Anlg”: Automatically switches to analog recording if the track cannot be digitally recorded for SCMS. • “Digital Copy”: Performs digital copying of only those tracks that can be digitally copied. • “Digital Move”: Performs digital copying of the tracks that cannot be digitally copied by “Digital Copy” when copying from the HDD onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • “Analog Copy”: Performs analog copying regardless of the SCMS standard. ■ Digital Move This unit has a built-in HDD with large space that makes a long recording possible. You can create your own CD by editing the various program sources that have been recorded onto the HDD of this unit and copying them onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. If you want to make a digital copy of the original data that has been created on the HDD to a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the “Digital Move” method is convenient. You can make a digital copy from the HDD onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc even if the track is protected from making a second-generation copy by the SCMS standard. However, since the concept of “Digital Move” is that the data is moved from the HDD onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the original data on the HDD is erased when moving is complete. See page 65 for details. • One CD-R or CD-RW disc, or one disc on the HDD can be recorded with up to 99 tracks on them. • Once 99 tracks have been recorded, no further recording is possible even if space for recording is available on the disc. • The minimum length of one track must be 4 seconds. If a recording is stopped while the track is less than 4 seconds long, this unit will record for 4 seconds, and then stop recording. The maximum length of one track is 99 minutes 59 seconds for the HDD. • 999 discs can be created at maximum on the HDD of this unit. However, the number of discs that can be created is limited according to the space availability (total recordable time) on the HDD. • The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. However, since each track on the HDD is handled in the unit of frame (75 frames are equal to one second), the maximum length of one track or disc may vary slightly. • When recording on a CD-R or CD-RW disc, 2-second silence will be automatically added to the beginning of the first track. Therefore the actual total recordable time will be 2 seconds shorter than the total recordable time of a CD-R or CD-RW disc. ■ Source sampling rate conversion • Digital input of this unit supports sampling frequencies of 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, and 96kHz. This unit converts these inputs to the 44.1kHz,16-bit digital signals and records them onto the HDD, or a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • Analog input is also converted to the same digital signal to be recorded. • This unit outputs the signals at the sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, 16-bit from its digital output. ■ Recording of non-audio signals • This unit is designed exclusively for recording audio signals. Recording is only possible for audio signals. • When a CD with CD TEXT is copied onto the HDD, CD TEXT will be automatically copied if it is not copy protected. When a CD with CD TEXT is recorded from an external CD player, CD TEXT cannot be copied even if it is not copy protected. To copy CD TEXT, use the built-in CDR drive of this unit. • If the digital signals contain graphic data such as CD graphics, the non-audio signals will not be recorded. • It is not possible to record from non-audio sources such as CDROM or DVD. ■ Data processing • A small amount of space may be used for data processing besides recording the actual program sources. • Although this unit is capable of recording 999 albums at maximum onto the HDD, the data processing speed may slow down if a large number of albums is created. 5 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-5 102_HD1300(E)01-13 GETTING STARTED Rules of Digital Recording RULES OF DIGITAL RECORDING AND NOTES ON SYSTEM Data on the HDD The data recorded onto the built-in HDD of this unit will be numbered and organized based on the following concept: Disc One consequent recording is counted and numbered as one unit of disc. The HDD of this unit can record 999 discs at maximum. (However, the number of discs to be created may be less than 999 for the space availability on the HDD.) The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99minutes 59 seconds. Bookmark This unit can make a temporary bookmark on a favorite track as playing back. The list of the program sources marked is called “bookmark”. This marking is temporary and cannot be duplicated. However, an album can be easily created by copying the bookmarked tracks. See page 32 for details. Track 99 tracks can be recorded onto a disc at maximum. (However the number of discs tracks to be recorded may be less than 99 for the space availability on the HDD.) One track must be 4 seconds at shortest and 99 minutes 59 seconds at longest. Group A collection of disc(s), album(s), and a bookmark are generically called “group”. Album A group of the source programs selected from different discs and recorded as the playlist is called “album”. “Album” corresponds to the “program” function (to play back favorite tracks in the desired order) of a standard CD player. This unit can record 999 albums at maximum onto the HDD. Disc Track Bookmark Track 1 ✓ Track 2 Disc 1 Track 3 Album Example of the playlist ✓ Disc 1 1 2 2 Track 99 Track 1 2 2 3 Track 1 Track 2 Disc 2 ✓ Track 3 Track 99 ✓ Example of the copied tracks with bookmarks Disc Track 1 2 1 999 2 1 2 3 3 99 Track 1 Track 2 Disc 999 Track 3 ✓ * The tracks are listed in the order of copying. Track 99 E-6 102_HD1300(E)01-13 6 02.6.24, 6:51 PM NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS Front Panel 4 5 6 789 0 q GETTING STARTED 2 3 1 w er MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE MENU POWER CLEAR BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN t MIN MAX u y MAX i o p as d f g h 1 POWER r CLEAR 2 HDD t PHONES jack 3 CDR y PHONES LEVEL control 4 COPY u A.M.Q.R. 5 Front panel display i REC 6 Disc tray o t/e (Skip/Search) 7 v (Open/Close) p FINALIZE 8 TRACK NO./BOOKMARK a ERASE 9 TEXT/TIME s r/y (Search/Skip) 0 COMPLETE d INPUT q MODE f w/d (Play/Pause) w MULTI JOG knob/DIGITAL REC LEVEL control g ANALOG REC LEVEL control e MENU h a (Stop) 102_HD1300(E)01-13 7 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-7 NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS Remote Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE MENU COMPLETE q w e CLEAR 1 ABC ENTER 2 DEF 3 COPY 3 TIMER REC i 4 A.M.Q.R. o 5 FINALIZE 6 TEXT/TIME 7 MODE 8 COMPLETE 9 CLEAR 0 Alphabetical/numeric buttons q REPEAT w RANDOM e GROUP SKIP q r t (Track Skip) t d (Pause) p a s f GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO GROUP SKIP r t y u 2 d 8 0 OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE 7 9 1 g y e (Search) h u HDD j i REC o ERASE p TRACK NO. WRITE a INPUT s MENU d +/– f ENTER g BOOKMARK h INTRO j GROUP SKIP w k y (Track Skip) l r (Search) ; w (Play) z CDR x a (Stop) k HDD CDR l ; z x E-8 102_HD1300(E)01-13 8 02.6.24, 6:51 PM NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS ■ Loading the batteries in the remote control ■ Remote control operation range 1. Remove the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control. MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE MENU POWER CLEAR GETTING STARTED BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL 2. Insert 2 batteries (AA, UM-3 or R6 type) according to HDD PHONES CDR COPY LEVEL INPUT REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Close the cover until it snaps into place. Remote control sensor 1 3 2 Within 6m (20’) 30° 30° ■ Battery replacement If you find that the remote control must be used closer to this unit than usual, the batteries are weak. Replace both batteries with new ones. ■ Notes on batteries • • • • • Use only AA, UM-3, or R6 type batteries for replacement. Do not mix a new battery with a used one. A rechargeable battery cannot be used. Do not mix different types of battery. Do not attempt to short out the batteries by directly connecting the plus (+) and the minus (–) with a piece of metal. • Remove the batteries if the remote control will not be used for an extended period of time. • If batteries leak, dispose of them immediately. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Cautions • If operation of this unit by the remote control creates any malfunction in any other components, change the placement of the component. • Do not spill any liquid on or drop the remote control. Do not place it near a heater or in the bathroom where the temperature and humidity become high. • Make sure the remote control sensor is not exposed to direct sunlight or strong lights. If it is, it may not function correctly. 102_HD1300(E)01-13 9 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-9 NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS Display 1 2 3 4 5 6 8888888888888 ALBM TOTAL DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. AUTO PRD DIG M MARK S G A REP RNDM MULT ALL SYNC ANLG 8 9 0 q L dB –30 –10 w q –6 –2 0 R e 1 HDD mark 2 TOTAL indicator 3 DUPLCT indicator 4 A.M.Q.R. indicator 5 Information display 6 CDR mark 7 REC indicator DIG indicator 8 ALBM indicator M indicator 9 MARK indicator 0 Playback mode/play style indicator Recording/copying mode indicator PRD indicator MULT indicator ALL indicator SYNC indicator w Copying method indicator ANLG indicator e Level meter r TOC indicator G indicator t CD-RW indicator A indicator y MULTI JOG status indicator S indicator REP indicator LEVEL indicator RNDM indicator TRACK indicator GROUP indicator TIME indicator E-10 102_HD1300(E)01-13 10 REC LEVEL TRACK TOC GROUP CDRW TIME r t AUTO indicator 02.6.24, 6:51 PM 7 y NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS Display Information ■ Display while playing the data on the HDD ■ Display while playing a CD Group number, track number and elapsed time of the track being played Track number and elapsed time of the track being played 1 Dsc001 1 004 004 L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC GROUP CD GROUP R Group number, track number and remaining time of the track being played GETTING STARTED The display located in the center of this unit provides the information about the drive (HDD or CDR drive) selected. Each time TEXT/TIME is pressed, the display changes according to the operation. Track number and remaining time of the track being played 1- 221 Dsc001 1- 221 L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC GROUP CD GROUP R Disc total time Group number and group total time Dsc001 6545 6545 L TOTAL G dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 L TOTAL dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC GROUP CD GROUP R Disc remaining time Group number and group remaining time Dsc001 -6240 -6240 L TOTAL dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R L TOTAL G dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TOC GROUP CD GROUP R CD TEXT (when available) Disc title Group title or track title Group title LIVE AT CRANE LIVE AT CRANE L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC GROUP CD GROUP R Track title Track title PRIDE AND JOY TRACK PRIDE AND JOY L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TRACK TOC CD L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The group title with the GROUP indicator and the track title with the TRACK indicator are switched by pressing the MULTI JOG knob. The group title with the GROUP indicator and the track title with the TRACK indicator are switched by pressing the MULTI JOG knob. ■ Display while recording onto the HDD ■ Display while recording onto a CD-R or CDRW disc Disc number, track number and elapsed time of the track being recorded Track number and elapsed time of the track being recorded Dsc001 1 004 REC 1 004 REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 L R dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Disc number and total recorded time on the disc Dsc001 1543 L TOTAL dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP CDRW Total recorded time on a disc REC 1543 L TOTAL dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R REC GROUP CDRW Total recordable time on a disc L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC GROUP CDRW E-11 102_HD1300(E)01-13 11 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English - 221 TOTAL NAMES OF BUTTONS AND CONTROLS Rear Panel 1 2 3 VIDEO OUT S VIDEO VIDEO L L R R 4 REC PLAY 3 COAXIAL LINE IN — LINE OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL IN ANALOG OPTICAL OUT RS–232C DIGITAL 4 5 6 (U.S.A. model) 1 HDD slot 2 VIDEO OUT jacks DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack S VIDEO jack DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack VIDEO jack DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack 3 AC inlet 4 ANALOG jacks 5 DIGITAL jacks DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack 6 RS-232C terminal ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks CONNECTIONS Turn off the power of this unit and the other components, and unplug them from the wall outlet before making any connections. ■ Digital connections • This unit has the DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks and DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks. Connect either the DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks, or the DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks according to the component to be connected. • Using the optical fiber cable, connect the DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack on this unit to the digital optical output jack on the other component, and the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack on this unit to the digital optical input jack on the other component. • When using the DIGITAL IN/OUT (COAXIAL) jacks, make connections with coaxial cables. Connect the DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack on this unit to the digital coaxial output jack on the other component, and the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this unit to the digital coaxial input jack on the other component. ■ Analog connections • Make sure to connect the L (left) and R (right) input and output jacks on this unit to the correct L (left) and R (right) input and output jacks on the other component. • Connect the ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jack on this unit to the analog output jack on the other component, and the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack on this unit to the analog input jack on the other component. • The ANALOG LINE IN (REC)/LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks on this unit are numbered # and $ respectively. Connect these jacks to the jacks with the same numbers when connecting this unit to a Yamaha amplifier or receiver. • To connect the turntable directly to this unit, first connect it to the phono equalizer and then connect to the ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks on this unit. Notes • When you play the data on the HDD or CDs, signals are output both from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack and from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks. • Signals that are output through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jacks or the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jacks while playing the data on the HDD do not have information about the track markers. Therefore if these signals are recorded by an MD player, the track markers may not be placed correctly on the recorded MD disc. E-12 102_HD1300(E)01-13 12 02.6.24, 6:51 PM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a monitor • Arrow marks (➞) in the illustration below indicate the direction of the audio signal. Monitor DVD player, cable TV tuner, etc Coaxial cable (optional) DIGITAL OUTPUT GETTING STARTED • You can display the list of groups or tracks to be played, copying/recording settings or the list of setting items on the monitor by connecting the monitor to this unit. Connect the S VIDEO jack or the VIDEO jack whichever available on your monitor. • Use a commercially available S-video cable to connect the S VIDEO jack on this unit and the S-video input jack on the monitor. • Use an included video pin cable to connect the VIDEO jack on this unit and the composite video jack on the monitor. VIDEO IN S VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL S video cable (optional) Video pin cable (included) VIDEO OUT S VIDEO VIDEO L L R 4 R REC PLAY 3 COAXIAL LINE IN — LINE OUT ANALOG Audio pin cable (included) OPTICAL COAXIAL IN OPTICAL OUT (U.S.A. model) RS–232C DIGITAL *RS-232C terminal Optical cable (one included) To wall outlet DIGITAL INPUT Audio pin cable (included) REC COAXIAL PLAY L L R **Coaxial cable OPTICAL R OUT IN OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Amplifier or receiver *This terminal is for connection of the personal computer. Information about the connection software is to be announced on the YAMAHA website (see page 93). **For U.S.A. model, one coaxial cable with ferrite core is included. Be sure to connect to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack with this cable, directing the side with ferrite core to this unit. ■ Connecting the power cable Plug the power cable into the AC inlet when all connections are complete, and then plug in the power cable to the wall outlet. [Europe, U.K. and Australia models] Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. 102_HD1300(E)01-13 13 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-13 COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD Copying All Tracks on a CD You can copy all tracks on a CD onto the HDD. 2,4 5 3 2,4 5 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL HDD OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL CDR ENTER 6 ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX 1 1 6 1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on the front panel. The message “WELCOME TO YAMAHA HDD/CD SYSTEM” appears on the display. After the message is displayed, this unit is ready for operation. 2. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray. ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of the CD) when the CD is loaded. It takes approximately 10 to 15 seconds to complete the reading. The following message appears on the display during the reading. Reading L dB 3. Load the CD to copy from on the disc tray. Place a CD correctly aligned in the recessed area of the disc tray with its label side facing up. –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R When reading the information has been completed, the display changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation. Total number of tracks Total time 14 6817 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC GROUP CD 1 L dB R 4. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. Note • The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of the disc tray gently. If the disc tray is closed in this way, this unit starts playback of a CD. Press a to stop playback. E-14 103_HD1300(E)14-28 14 02.6.24, 6:51 PM –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TOC GROUP CD COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD 5. Press COPY once. The following message appears on the display, and this unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. HDD π CD-RW DIG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 003 1π 1 DIG ALL SYNC 000 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R REC TOC GROUP CD REC TOC GROUP CD 6. Start copying. Output of the signals during copying • During copying at 1x speed, signals are output both from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack and from the DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks. • During copying at 2x speed, signals are output only from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack. • During copying at 4x or more speed, signals are output neither from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jack nor the DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. 003 1π 1 DIG ALL SYNC 001 L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC TOC GROUP CD The copying conditions (initial settings) are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Copy” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: “Best Effort” To change the settings, see “Copying menu setting” on page 18. Notes • It takes a few seconds for this unit to become ready to start copying after w/d (w on the remote control) has been pressed. • This unit may create some vibration and rotation noise while performing the copying process by rotating a CD at high speed. If this problem occurs, lower the copying speed to decrease the vibration and rotation noise. (See “Copy Speed” on page 19.) COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD ALL SYNC L CD TEXT If the CD to be copied contains CD TEXT that can be copied, CD TEXT is automatically copied when the CD is copied onto the HDD. To cancel copying, press a. When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. 103_HD1300(E)14-28 15 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-15 COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD Copying Favorite Tracks on the CD You can copy your favorite tracks on a CD onto the HDD. 1 5 1 1 3,6 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ OPEN/CLOSE COPY 5 TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO REC 3,6 ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE A.M.Q.R. ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL HDD OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL CDR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX 1 2,7 1. Load the CD to copy from on the disc tray. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD with its label side facing up. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. 2. Start playback of the CD. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start playback. Playback is started from the beginning of the first track. 3.Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) while your favorite track is being played. The MARK indicator lights on the display. 4 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 5. Press COPY once. This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. 6. Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control). The list of the track that the bookmark is placed to is selected as the group to be copied (the MARK indicator lights on the display). Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) again to return to the normal copy standby mode. 7. Start copying. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. 003 1π 1 MARK DIG MARK Press t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control) to skip tracks, and repeat above operation. To cancel a bookmark Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the track. The MARK indicator turns off on the display. 4. When the bookmark have been placed to all favorite tracks, press a to stop playback. Tracks are listed and stored in order that the bookmarks have been placed. To cancel all bookmarks Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the front panel while this unit is in the stop mode. “Bookmark Clr” appears on the display, and all bookmarks are canceled. ALL SYNC R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC TOC GROUP CD To cancel copying, press a. When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. E-16 16 001 L dB Notes • It takes a few seconds for this unit to become ready to start copying after w/d (w on the remote control) has been pressed. • This unit may create some vibration and rotation noise while performing the copying process by rotating a CD at high speed. If this problem occurs, lower the copying speed to decrease the vibration and rotation noise. (See “Copy Speed” on page 19.) Note • The bookmark placed to the track on the CD will be canceled if the disc tray is open, or the power of this unit is turned off. 103_HD1300(E)14-28 2,7 4 02.6.24, 6:51 PM COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD Advanced Operations ■ Making an additional copying onto an already recorded disc MULTI JOG ■ Setting the copying mode This unit provides various copying modes. Choose the one that suits your needs. PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE MENU MODE MULTI JOG CLEAR BOOKMARK MULTI JOG ER DIGITAL REC LEVEL PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL BOOKMARK ANALOG MIN DIGITAL REC LEVEL MAX COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL ANALOG 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO MIN MAX t/e, r/y 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ OPEN/CLOSE GROUP SKIP q GROUP SKIP w GROUP SKIP COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE HDD TEXT/TIME CDR INPUT MODE +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MENU MODE t, y COMPLETE +, – ENTER When the copying onto the HDD, you can select the disc on the HDD to make copy on. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press GROUP SKIP q/GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to select the disc number to make the copy on while this unit is in the copy standby mode. 003 1π 1 DIG ALL SYNC 000 L dB –30 –10 R –6 –2 0 REC TOC GROUP CD Disc number to make the copy on Notes • If the disc number is not selected, copying will be made on the disc with the smallest number available on the HDD. • When a disc number with recorded tracks is selected, new recordings will be added to the end of the last track that has been previously recorded. HDD CLEAR 1 CDR ENTER ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 1. Press MODE while this unit is in the copy standby mode. You can select the copying mode. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the copying mode. Choose one of the modes listed below. All Synchro (All-synchronized copying mode) This mode copies all of the material from a single audio source at the same time as the source programs are being played. Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded. Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized copying mode) This mode copies the set number of tracks at the same time as the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources. 17 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-17 103_HD1300(E)14-28 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD Initial setting: All Synchro MULTI JOG ER COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the copying mode selected. If “All Synchro” is confirmed, this unit returns to the copy standby mode. If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message appears on the display. Go to step 4. How many ? DIG MULT SYNC 1 L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 ■ Copying menu setting You can make detailed settings on the menu for your copying. Follow the steps described below for menu setting. MULTI JOG MENU MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR REC BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL TOC CD COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN 4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI MAX JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The number can be selected in the 1 to 99 tracks range. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote OPEN/CLOSE control) to confirm the number selected. This unit returns to the copy standby mode. COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE 6. Select the track to start copy from by pressing t/e TEXT/TIME INPUT REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE or r/y (t or y on the remote control). MODE MENU MENU COMPLETE +, – CLEAR ENTER ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the copy standby mode. You can start setting the copying menu. 2. Select the menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The copying menu contains 3 items as follows: • Copy Method (setting the copying method) • Copy Level (setting the copying level) • Copy Speed (setting the copying speed) 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the menu item to be adjusted. 4. Adjust the parameter for each item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). See the further steps for detailed instructions on parameter adjustment for each item. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the setting when adjustment has been completed. 6. Press MENU to close the menu. This unit returns to the copy standby mode. E-18 103_HD1300(E)14-28 18 02.6.24, 6:51 PM COPYING FROM A CD ONTO THE HDD ■ Copy Method 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Setting of the copying method. Copying may fail if the setting for “Copy Method” is not correctly made. Copy Method REC L DIG dB ALL SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC CD Digital Copy This method always makes digital copies. Copying is not possible if the tracks are copy protected by the SCMS standard (see page 5). Auto Dig/Anlg Digital and analog copying are automatically switched depending on the track. If digital copying is prohibited by the SCMS standard (see page 5), an analog copy is made. For those tracks that can be digitally copied, a digital copy is made. Notes • Level adjustment is not possible during copying. • If the red part on the peak level meter lights at the loudest sound levels, stop copying to adjust the copying level, and then resume copying. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 TOC CD 0 R • If the level is adjusted, copying is made at maximum 2x speed. ■ Copy Speed Setting of the copying speed. Copy Speed DIG Analog Copy This method always makes analog copies. ALL SYNC REC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TOC CD Initial setting: Best Effort Notes • In analog copying, the data may be copied at a lower sound level. • The setting is stored in the memory and applies to future copying. ■ Copy Level Setting of the sound level for copying. Sound level adjustment is not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the copying sound level to suit you needs. Copy Level REC L DIG dB ALL SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 0.0dB DIG ALL SYNC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 1x Copy Copying is always made at 1x speed despite the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings. TOC CD The following message appears on the display when “Copy Level” setting is confirmed in step 3 for “Copying menu setting” on page 18. Level Best Effort Copying is made at the maximum speed possible depending on the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings. • When “Digital Copy” is selected: maximum 10x speed • When “Auto Dig/Anlg” is selected: maximum 2x speed • When “Analog Copy” is selected: maximum 2x speed COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD Initial setting: Digital Copy control) to confirm the copying level setting. REC LEVEL TOC CD 2x Copy Copying is always made at 2x speed despite the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings. Notes • If there are scratches or dust on the CD, the copy speed may drop automatically even when “Best Effort” is selected. • The setting is stored in the memory and applies to future copying. 1. Adjust the copying sound level by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB steps. 103_HD1300(E)14-28 19 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-19 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD Recording from the Digital Components You can make recordings from the component such as a cable TV tuner and a DVD player digitally connected to this unit. Note • Recording onto the HDD is made in the unit called “disc”. The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. If the recording has been made exceeding the maximum length, the recording will be made continuously to the next available disc. 4 JKL 5 MNO 7 6 PQR 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE 6 5 5 COPY 3 TIMER REC REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME 4 POWER TRACK NO. WRITE INPUT MODE GROUP SKIP MENU 5 BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. 5 ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL CLEAR 1 MIN MAX 2 3 1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on the front panel. The message “WELCOME TO YAMAHA HDD/CD SYSTEM” appears on the display. After the message is displayed, this unit is ready for operation. 2. Press HDD to select the HDD. 3. Press REC. 000 L dB SYNC Disc number to be recorded 8 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC GROUP R Track number to be recorded 4. Select the input source to be recorded. Press INPUT repeatedly until the OPTICAL or COAXIAL indicator lights up. 5. Adjust the recording level. The adjustment of the digital recording level is not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level to suit your needs. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to be recorded. By pressing MENU, the display changes for the level adjustment. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the recording level. When the adjustment is completed, press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the adjusted recording level. +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 6. Start recording. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording. Dsc002 1 SYNC REC dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording temporarily. The HDD mark flashes and the track number is advanced to the next. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording. 8. Press a to stop recording. The first track number of the disc at which recording has been stopped is indicated on the display. Dsc002 1 L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R IMPORTANT • Never turn off the power of this unit during recording. Recording may not be correctly made, or the data on the HDD may be damaged. • During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged. See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details. E-20 20 001 L Note • Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels. 103_HD1300(E)14-28 CDR 7. Start playing the source. The HDD mark flashes, and the disc and track numbers to be recorded are indicated on the display. Recording has not been started yet at this stage. (Recording pause mode) Dsc002 1 4 MAX 1 HDD 2 ENTER ANALOG MIN 6 6 8 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD Recording from the Analog Components You can make recordings from the component such as a cassette deck and a turntable connected to this unit. 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE 6 COPY 3 TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR POWER TEXT/TIME 4 INPUT MODE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 1 2 3 1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on the front panel. This unit enters the recording pause mode. L SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO HDD CDR 7. Start playing the source. 8. Press a to stop recording. 000 dB 4 5 8 1 2 Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording temporarily. The HDD mark flashes and the track number is advanced to the next. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording. 2. Press HDD to select the HDD. 3. Press REC. Dsc002 1 MAX 6 6 8 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD Note • Recording onto the HDD is made in the unit called “disc”. The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. If the recording has been made exceeding the maximum length, the recording will be made continuously to the next available disc. 0 REC GROUP The first track number of the disc at which recording has been stopped is indicated on the display. R Dsc002 1 4. Select the input source to be recorded. L Press INPUT repeatedly until the ANALOG indicator lights up. 5. Adjust the recording level. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to be recorded, and rotate the ANALOG REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level. Note • Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels. dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R IMPORTANT • Never turn off the power of this unit during recording. Recording may not be correctly made, or the data on the HDD may be damaged. • During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged. See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details. 6. Start recording. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording. Dsc002 1 001 REC L dB SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 103_HD1300(E)14-28 21 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-21 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD Recording Using an External Timer ■ Notes on recording time setting • This unit is not equipped with the clock function. Use an external timer when making a timer recording. • It may take 30 seconds to 1 minute after the power of this unit is turned on by an external timer until an actual recording starts. (This length of time is subject to change depending on the condition.) During this time, no recording is made. Therefore set the time that is 2-minute earlier than the starting time of the program to be recorded for turning on this unit. • As a characteristic of an HDD recorder, it is necessary to store information to control audio data as well as audio data itself. This information is normally recorded when recording is stopped. Therefore if the power of this unit is turned off before recording is stopped, no information to control audio data and no audio data are stored. Set the time that is longer than 3-minute after the program to be recorded finishes for turning off this unit by an external timer. • Set the time that is 2-minute longer than actual recording time for the total recording time. Following chart indicates the time flow when this unit makes timer recordings. Time to be set on the external timer (2 minutes + recording time + 3 minutes or longer) Recording time to be set on the CDR-HD1300 (Recording time + 2 minutes) Recording time Program ending time Program starting time External timer turns on CDR-HD1300 starts recording (30 seconds to 1 minute after the external timer turns on.) External timer turns off CDR-HD1300 finishes recording Time flow Example: To record the program that starts at 9:00 and ends at 10:00. • Set the external timer to be turned on at 8:58. • Set the external timer to be turned off after 10:03. • Set 1 hour 2 minutes for the total recording time on this unit. Notes • Actual recorded material includes a little more than the set amount of time at both beginning and end of the recording. Delete unnecessary parts using the editing operation. • Recording will be stopped if copy protected digital signals are input while timer recording is being made. • If you set the total recording time over 99 minutes 59 seconds, recording will be made extending several discs. To play the recorded materials sequentially, select “Style All” as the play style. See “Setting the Play Style” on page 80. See next page for the setting procedure. E-22 103_HD1300(E)14-28 22 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD ■ Setting for a timer recording 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR POWER BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL PHONES CDR COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 1 TIMER REC REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER HDD COPY A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE 2 3,7 1. Turn on the power of this unit by pressing POWER on the front panel. MAX TEXT/TIME 4 6 5,6,8,9 9 4 5 INPUT MODE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MENU COMPLETE CLEAR 2 ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ HDD CDR +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 8. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to set the total time of timer recording. Total time can be set as long as the recordable maximum time by 1-minute step. 2. Press HDD to select the HDD. Notes • A timer recording cannot be made when recording onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • You can directly go to step 7 to set the total time of timer recording by pressing TIMER REC on the remote control. 9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the total time of timer recording. “Timer Standby” appears on the display. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD 3,7 2,7 6 5,6,8,9 5 Timer Standby L 3. Press REC. dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R This unit enters the recording pause mode. To cancel timer recording setting, press a. 4. Select the input source to be recorded. Press INPUT to select the input source from among OPTICAL, COAXIAL, and ANALOG. 5. Adjust the recording level. See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24. 6. Select a recording mode. Select one of “Manual” (manual recording), “Track Synchro” (track-synchronized recording) or “Auto Period” (auto-period recording). Other modes cannot be selected when timer recording is made. 7. Press and hold REC for approximately 3 seconds 10. Leave the power of this unit on. Turn off the power of this unit by the external timer. If the power of this unit is turned on by the external timer, “Timer Standby” flashes for approximately 5 seconds. Then recording starts according to the setting. Note • Once timer recording is set, recording starts every time the power of this unit is turned on. To cancel the setting, press a while “Timer Standby” is flashing, or while recording is being made. (press TIMER REC on the remote control). Following message appears on the display. Then set the total amount of time of timer recording. T.Span 1h 2m REC L dB SYNC R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME 103_HD1300(E)14-28 23 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-23 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD Adjusting the Recording Level There is an adjusting procedure for each input source to be recorded as explained below. Choose the one for your input source and follow the steps. OPEN/CLOSE COPY MULTI JOG TIMER REC REC MENU A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE TRACK NO. WRITE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL MENU COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE COMPLETE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. CLEAR COAXIAL ENTER +, – ANALOG MIN MAX ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ ANALOG REC LEVEL ■ When recording a digital input source The digital recording level is set to 0dB, the level of the input source, as an initial setting. Further adjustment is not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level to suit your needs. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the recording pause mode. The following message appears on the display. Level 0.0dB REC LEVEL L SYNC dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to return to the previous display. Notes • The recording level can be adjusted while this unit is in either the recording or recording pause mode. Once recording has been stopped, the recording level is reset to 0dB. • Adjustment of the recording level can be canceled by pressing MENU when the level is adjusted in the recording pause mode. • The recording level is set to 0dB by pressing CLEAR when the level is adjusted in the recording pause mode. R 2. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to be recorded. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the recording level. ■ When recording an analog input source 1. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to be recorded. 2. Adjust the recording level by rotating the ANALOG REC LEVEL control. Rotate the control clockwise to increase the level and counterclockwise to decrease the level. Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels. Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB steps. Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels. Note • The recording level can be adjusted while this unit is in either the recording or recording pause mode. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R E-24 103_HD1300(E)14-28 24 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD Advanced Operations ■ Making an additional recording onto an already recorded disc MULTI JOG ■ Setting the recording mode This unit provides various recording modes. Choose the one that suits your needs. PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR MODE MULTI JOG MULTI JOG ER BOOKMARK PUSH ENTER DIGITAL REC LEVEL TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. BOOKMARK COAXIAL DIGITAL REC LEVEL ANALOG MIN MAX COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN 4 JKL 5 MNO 7 6 PQR 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO MAX OPEN/CLOSE COPY GROUP SKIP q TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE HDD REC GROUP SKIP w GROUP SKIP CDR ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE MENU MODE COMPLETE +, – CLEAR ENTER ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD Initial setting: Track Synchro MULTI JOG ER 1. Press MODE while this unit is in the recording pause When recording onto the HDD, you can select the disc on the HDD for your recording. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press GROUP SKIP q/GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to select the disc number on which recordings are to be made while this unit is in the recording pause mode. Dsc002 1 000 L dB SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC GROUP R Disc number on which recordings are to be made Notes • When no disc number is selected, recordings are made onto the disc with the smallest number available on the HDD. • When a disc with recorded tracks is selected, new recordings are added to the end of the previous recordings. mode. The recording mode can be selected. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the recording mode. Choose one of the modes listed below. Manual (Manual recording mode) All the recording operations including starting, stopping and track marking are performed manually. Track Synchro (Track-synchronized recording mode) Starting and stopping are performed manually. Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded. Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized recording mode) This mode records the set number of tracks at the same time as the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources. All Synchro (All-synchronized recording mode) This mode records all of the material from a single audio source at the same time as the source programs are being played. Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded. E-25 103_HD1300(E)14-28 25 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English Auto Period (Auto-period recording mode) This mode makes recording for the set amount of time while placing track markers at the set time interval. The length between track markers can be adjusted in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes range by 10-second steps. This mode is convenient to search for material recorded from FM broadcasts. RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the recording mode selected. If “Manual”, “Track Synchro” or “All Synchro” is confirmed, this unit returns the recording pause mode. If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, following message appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 4 and 5. How many ? 1 SYNC dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R If “Auto Period” is confirmed, following message appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 6 to 9. Period ? AUTO PRD 300 REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TIME 4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The number can be set in the 1 to 99 tracks range. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the number of tracks to be set. This unit returns to the recording pause mode. 6. Select the time length between track markers by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The time length can be set in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes range by 10-seconds steps. 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the time length between the selected track markers. The following message appears on the display. The total recording time can be set. Total? 0h 4m AUTO PRD This unit automatically detects track intervals when recording is made in track-synchronized recording mode, multi-synchronized recording mode, or all-synchronized recording mode. You can set the condition for detecting track intervals. Setting items are as follows: REC L MULT ■ Setting a condition at synchronized recording REC OPT TH Level Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) jack as “no signal”. Initial setting: –50dB, Control range: –90 to –20dB COAX TH Level Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jack as “no signal”. Initial setting: –50dB, Control range: –90 to –20dB ANLG TH Level Sets the signal level that judges the signals input through the ANALOG LINE IN (REC) jacks as “no signal”. Initial setting: –40dB, Control range: –60 to –20dB Int. Time Sets the length of silence (“no signal”) that judges track intervals. When the set amount of silence continues, this unit judges it as a track interval and places a track marker. Initial setting: 2.0 seconds, Control range: 0.5 to 5.0 seconds End Duration Sets the length of silence (“no signal”) that judges the end of playback when recording in the all-synchronized recording mode. When the set amount of silence continues, recording will be stopped. Initial setting: 12.0 seconds, Control range: 2.0 to 60.0 seconds Note • Settings for “Int. Time” and “End Duration” apply to each input jack. L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME See next page for the setting procedure. 8. Select the total recording time by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the total recording time. This unit returns to the recording pause mode. Notes • When recording to the HDD in the auto period recording mode, the recording will be performed continuously to the next available disc if the time length between selected track markers exceeds the group remaining time. • In the auto period recording mode, a time error can occur in a frame unit. Therefore, the time of each track or the group total time may not match the confirmed time length between selected track markers or the total recording time. E-26 103_HD1300(E)14-28 26 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD ■ Setting a condition for synchronized recording MULTI JOG MENU control) to adjust the level. Level can be set by 1dB step. Example: To set “ANLG TH Level” MULTI JOG ER 6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE MENU CLEAR ANLG TH -40dB LEVEL DIGITAL REC LEVEL dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the level. Setting item selection appears on the display. 8. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE control) to set an interval. “Int. Time” can be set by 0.5-second steps, and “End Duration” can be set by 1.0-second steps. REC ERASE Example: To set “Int.Time” TRACK NO. WRITE MENU MENU Time 2.0sec L COMPLETE dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R +, – CLEAR ENTER 1 ABC TIME ENTER 2 DEF 3 GHI 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. Menu item selection appears on the display. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote 9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to set an interval. Setting item selection appears on the display. Press MENU twice to close the menu and return to the normal stop mode. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO THE HDD L BOOKMARK control) to select “Synchro Setup”. Synchro Setup L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). Setting item selection appears on the display. 4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to select a setting item. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the setting item. If “OPT TH Level”, “COAX TH Level” or “ANLG TH Level” is confirmed, make a setting following steps 6 and 7. If “Int. Time” or “End Duration” is confirmed, make a setting following 8 and 9. 103_HD1300(E)14-28 27 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-27 RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO THE HDD ■ Manual track marking OPEN/CLOSE TRACK NO./BOOKMARK COPY TIMER REC REC MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TRACK NO. COMPLETE ERASE CLEAR TEXT/TIME BOOKMARK INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY MODE INPUT REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE MENU ANALOG REC LEVEL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX COMPLETE CLEAR 1 This unit can automatically place track markers. However you can also manually place track markers during your recording. (Manual track marking) Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (TRACK NO. WRITE on the remote control) during your recording. • A new track number is added at the location on the disc corresponding to the time TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (TRACK NO. WRITE on the remote control) is pressed. • Manual track marking is possible after the recording has been performed for 5 seconds from the beginning of the track, and a disc cannot contain more than 99 tracks. Even if there is time remaining on the disc, further recording is impossible once 99 track markers have been placed. ABC ENTER 2 28 DEF 3 GHI Notes • The track markers may not be placed properly even if the recording has been performed in the synchronized recording according to the type of the source devices. To avoid this problem, place the track markers manually. • Manual track marking is possible even during synchronized recording. • You can place the track markers to the tracks that have been recorded on the HDD by dividing the track. See “Track Divide” on page 46. E-28 103_HD1300(E)14-28 TRACK NO. WRITE OPTICAL 02.6.24, 6:51 PM EDITING MENU ITEMS You can make various editing operations on the albums, tracks and discs on the HDD. The editing menu is listed below. Menu item Album Edit Disc Edit Album New Edit Stored Album Copy Album Rename Album Delete Album Pack Album Title Track Shuffle Track Level Tr. Interval Track Rename Track Adjust Track Erase Part Erase Track Combine Track Divide Track Pack Add Fade In Add Fade Out Track Title Disc Rename Disc Erase Disc Combine Disc Divide Disc Pack Disc Title Selectable during playback* Page — — — — ✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ — 31 31, 32 32 33 33 34 34, 35 35, 36 36, 37 38 40 41, 42 42 43, 44 45 46, 47 47 48, 49 49, 50 50, 51 53 54 54, 55 55, 56 56 57 58 To create a new album To edit an already created album To copy other group as an album To change the album number To delete an album To eliminate unused album numbers To assign an album title To change the order of tracks in an album To adjust the track level in an album To adjust each track interval in an album To change a track number To adjust the beginning of a track To erase a track To erase the part of a track To combine a series of tracks To divide one track into two To eliminate unused track numbers To add fade-in to the beginning of a track To add fade-out to the end of a track To assign a track title To change a disc number To erase a disc To combine a series of discs To divide one disc into two To eliminate unused disc numbers To assign a disc title To cancel the editing operation Undo EDITING Track Edit Menu content *The item that can be selected during playback is marked with the ✓ mark. ■ Selection of the item during playback Selectable item is changed as follows according to the playback status. • Items with the ✓ mark in “Album Edit” can be selected while an album is being played. Alb001 1 001 L ALBM G dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R • Items with the ✓ mark in “Track Edit” can be selected while a disc with the TRACK indicator turned on. Dsc001 1 001 TRACK L G dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R • Items with the ✓ mark in “Disc Edit” can be selected while a disc with the GROUP indicator turned on. Dsc001 1 001 L G dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R • No item can be selected while a bookmark is being played. E-29 104_HD1300(E)29-38 29 02.7.26, 4:13 PM English Notes • To switch the GROUP indicator and the TRACK indicator, press the MULTI JOG knob. • To switch the group to be played, rotate the MULTI JOG knob with the GROUP indicator turned on. ALBUM EDITING You can select the desired tracks from among the ones recorded on the HDD and store them as an album in this unit’s memory. You can also edit the album afterwards. Album Editing Operation 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE MULTI JOG COPY MENU TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR MENU COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL +, – COMPLETE HDD CLEAR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ CDR HDD HDD STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO ■ Editing during the stop mode ■ Editing during playback 1. Press HDD to select the HDD. 2. Press MENU. 1. Press MENU while the album to be edited is being The display changes for the menu item selection. Album Edit L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the editing the menu item selection. 4. Select the editing menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the album editing menu items. • Album New • Edit Stored • Album Copy • Album Rename • Album Delete • Album Pack • Album Title • Track Shuffle • Track Level • Tr. Interval 5. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. played. The display changes for the editing menu item selection. 2. Select the editing menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the album editing menu items. • Album Delete • Album Title • Track Shuffle • Track Level • Tr. Interval 3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. 4. Start editing by following the setting steps (pages 31—38) for each item. Notes • If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state; – This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having started editing during the stop mode. – This unit returns to the playback if having started editing during the playback. • If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode. 6. Start editing by following the setting steps (pages 31—38) for each item. 7. Press a when all editing has been completed. The display changes to the one when this unit was in the stop mode. E-30 104_HD1300(E)29-38 30 02.6.24, 6:51 PM ALBUM EDITING Album New Edit Stored You can create a new album by selecting the desired tracks from among the ones recorded on the HDD. You can add tracks to or delete tracks from an already created album. 1. Select and confirm “Album New” in step 4 of “Editing 1. Select and confirm “Edit Stored” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Source disc during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Source track Edit 001 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 ? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 EDITING Dsc001 1≥ 1 GROUP R GROUP R Album to be edited Track in the album to be created The number of the source disc flashes. 2. Select the source disc by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the source disc. The number of the source track flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. The number of the album to be edited flashes. 2. Select the album to be edited by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to be edited. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the tracks to be added 4. Select the source track by rotating the MULTI JOG Track to be added Dsc001 1≥15 knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the source track. The track number of the album being created will be advanced to the next, and the display returns to the one shown in step 1. Repeat steps 2—5 to select other discs and tracks. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Track to be added or deleted ■ When adding new tracks 4. Select the track to be added by pressing t/e or r/y. 5. Select the disc that contains the track to be added by 6. Press COMPLETE. A new album is created with the selected tracks recorded on it. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Notes • You can switch the display by pressing TEXT/TIME while an album is being made: – If the title is assigned to the source disc or track, the title appears. – By pressing TEXT/TIME while the title is being displayed, the total time of the album being made appears for approximately 1 second, and the display returns to the one in step 1. – If no title is assigned to the source disc or track, the total time of the album being made appears for approximately 1 second, and the display returns to the one in step 1. • You can create a new album using the tracks with bookmarks (see “Album Copy” on page 32). Also see “BOOKMARK” on page 59. rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be added. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Continues to next page 104_HD1300(E)29-38 31 02.7.26, 4:13 PM English E-31 ALBUM EDITING 7. Select the track to be added by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 8. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be added. When continuing to add tracks to the album, repeat steps 4—8. 9. Press COMPLETE. The selected tracks are added to the album. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Album Copy You can copy the entire disc, album, or bookmark to a new album. 1. Select and confirm “Album Copy” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Copy Dsc001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R ■ When deleting tracks from the album 4. Select the track to be deleted by pressing t/e or r/y. Group to be copied from The number of the group to be copied from flashes. 2. Select the group to be copied from by rotating the 5. Press CLEAR. Note • The tracks following the deleted track will automatically be down-numbered. When continuing to delete tracks from the album, repeat steps 4 and 5. 6. Press COMPLETE. The selected tracks are deleted from the album. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The group to be copied from switches in the order of “disc” ➞ “album” ➞ “bookmark”. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the group to be copied from. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the group to be copied from and the number of the album to be copied to. The album to be copied on is assigned the smallest available number. Dsc001≥002 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Group to be copied from Album to be copied to Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The selected group is copied to a new album. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. E-32 104_HD1300(E)29-38 32 02.7.26, 4:13 PM ALBUM EDITING Album Rename Album Delete You can move the album and assign a new number. You can delete an existing album. 1. Select and confirm “Album Rename” in step 4 of ■ Editing during the stop mode “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Rename “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. 001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 1. Select and confirm “Album Delete” in step 4 of GROUP R 001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 EDITING Delete Album to be moved GROUP R The number of the album to be moved flashes. 2. Select the album to be moved by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to be moved. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the album to be moved and the new album number. L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Album to be moved The number of the album to be deleted flashes. 2. Select the album to be deleted by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to be deleted. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Alb001≥002 dB Album to be deleted New album number Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the new album number by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the new album number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 6. Press COMPLETE. The selected album has been moved and assigned a new number. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Notes • If the selected new album number is already in use, the albums following this renumbered album will be automatically upnumbered by one. However, if there is any unused album number, only the albums up to that number will be up-numbered. • The original number of the album that has been renumbered will be available for future use. 4. Press COMPLETE. The selected album has been deleted. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Album Delete” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 30. The album being played is confirmed to be deleted. 2. Press COMPLETE. The album being played will be deleted. Playback resumes from the beginning of the next album after the deleted album. If no album follows the deleted album, this unit plays the previous album of the deleted album. Note • The number of the deleted album will be available for future use. 104_HD1300(E)29-38 33 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-33 ALBUM EDITING 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Album Pack You can re-organize the album numbers by eliminating unused album numbers that have been created by changing album numbers or deleting albums. control) to confirm the album to assign a title to. The following message appears on the display. L dB 1. Select and confirm “Album Pack” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. –6 –2 2. Press COMPLETE. The album numbers are re-organized without unused album numbers. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Before “Album Pack” is performed 3 0 4. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG 0 R 1 –2 If the selected album already has a title, the title appears on the display. L –30 –10 –6 The cursor flashes. Pack ? dB –30 –10 R 4 knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See next page for entering procedure. 5. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been entered. The title is assigned to the selected album. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 6 ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Album Title” in step 2 of “Editing 1 2 3 4 5 6 After “Album Pack” has been performed (Unused album numbers have been eliminated.) : Unused album numbers during playback” on page 30. The album being played is confirmed for assigning the title to. The following message appears on the display. L ALBM dB G Album Title –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The cursor flashes. You can assign a title to a created album. If the selected album already has a title, the title appears on the display. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Album Title” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Title –30 –10 –6 –2 0 knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See next page for entering procedure. 3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been 001? L dB 2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG GROUP R Album to assign the title to entered. The title is assigned to the selected album. Playback resumes from the beginning of the album with the title assigned to. The number of the album to assign a title to flashes. 2. Select the album to assign a title to by rotating the Continues to next page MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). E-34 104_HD1300(E)29-38 34 02.6.24, 6:51 PM ALBUM EDITING ■ Entering the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob Track Shuffle 1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise. You can change the order of tracks in an album. When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character you wish to use for the title. 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected ■ Entering the title characters by using the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control 1. Select the character to be used for the title by using the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to select the desired symbol. 2. Select the next character by pressing one of the alphabetical/numeric buttons. The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next space. Note • If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new character is inserted in front of the existing character. ■ Correcting the characters Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/ e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter and confirm the new character. 1. Select and confirm “Track Shuffle” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Track to be moved EDITING character. The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters. ■ Editing during the stop mode Shuffle001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Album to change its tracks’ order The number of the album to change its tracks’ order flashes. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the album to change its tracks’ order. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to change its tracks’ order. The number of the track to be moved flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to select the track to be moved. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be moved. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the number of the album to change its tracks’ order, the number of the track to be moved, and the new track number. New track number 001 1≥ 2 TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Album to change its Track to be moved tracks’ order Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Continues to next page 104_HD1300(E)29-38 35 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-35 ALBUM EDITING 6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the new track number. 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the new track number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Track Level You can adjust the sound level of track in an album. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Level” in step 4 of “Editing 8. Press COMPLETE. The selected track has been moved and assigned a new number. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Track to adjust its level ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Shuffle” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 30. The track being played is confirmed to be moved. The number of the album and track being played and the new track number appear on the display. New track number 001 1≥ TRACK dB G Album being played –30 –10 –6 –2 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Album to adjust its tracks’ level The number of the album to adjust its tracks’ level flashes. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the album to adjust its tracks’ level. 2 L ALBM Level 0 R Track being played 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the new track number. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the new track number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The track being played has been moved and assigned a new number. Playback resumes from the beginning of the moved track. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to adjust its tracks’ level. The number of the track to adjust its level flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to select the track to adjust. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to adjust its level. Playback of the confirmed track starts, and the following message appears on the display. Tr. 1 0.0dB LEVEL L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track to adjust its level Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Continues to next page E-36 104_HD1300(E)29-38 36 02.7.26, 4:14 PM ALBUM EDITING 6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the level. Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB steps. You can compare the level with the previous or next tracks’ level by pressing t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). You can also search the passage in the selected track by pressing and holding t/e or r/y (e or r on the remote control). The level of the selected track is confirmed. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. EDITING 7. Press COMPLETE. Notes • The level may change slightly out of the point that the track itself changes during the playback of the album with its tracks’ level adjusted. In this case, add the 1-to-2 second interval using the “Tr. Interval” function described on the next page. • You can not copy the album with its tracks’ level adjusted in the Audio Master Quality Recording mode (see page 63). • You can also adjust the copy level (see page 66) when copying the album with its tracks’ level adjusted. The copy will be made in the total level adjusted in “Track Level” and “Copy Level” on the copy menu. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Level” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 30. The track being played is confirmed to adjust its level. The following message appears on the display. Tr. 1 0.0dB LEVEL L ALBM dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track being played 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the level. Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB steps. You can compare the level with the previous or next tracks’ level by pressing t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). You can also search the passage in the selected track by pressing and holding t/e or r/y (e or r on the remote control). 3. Press COMPLETE. The level of the track being played is confirmed. Playback resumes from the beginning of the track with its level adjusted. 104_HD1300(E)29-38 37 02.7.26, 4:16 PM English E-37 ALBUM EDITING 6. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote Tr. Interval control) to adjust the interval. Adjustment is possible in the 0 to 9.9 seconds range by 0.1second steps. You can adjust each track interval in an album. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Tr. Interval” in step 4 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 30. The following message appears on the display. Track to adjust its interval between the previous track Int. 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, the ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played with the adjusted interval. 7. Press COMPLETE. The interval between the selected track and the previous track is confirmed. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. GROUP 0 R ■ Editing during playback Album to adjust its track interval The number of the album to adjust its tracks’ interval flashes. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the album to adjust its tracks interval. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the album to adjust its tracks interval. The number of the track to be adjusted flashes. 1. Select and confirm “Tr. Interval” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 30. The track being played is confirmed to adjust its interval. The ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Int:3.5 513 L ALBM dB G R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to select the track to adjust its interval between the previous track. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to adjust its interval between the previous track. The ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Int:3.5 513 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track interval TIME Playing time of the track Track interval 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the interval. Adjustment is possible in the 0 to 9.9 seconds range by 0.1second steps. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, the ending of the previous track for 5 seconds and the beginning of the confirmed track for 5 seconds will be repeatedly played with the adjusted interval. 3. Press COMPLETE. The interval between the selected track and the previous track is confirmed. Playback resumes from the beginning of the track with its interval between the previous track adjusted. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Note • If there is no track before the track that is selected and confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this unit returns to step 4. E-38 104_HD1300(E)29-38 38 Playing time of the track 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING You can do various editing operations on the tracks that have been recorded on the HDD. Track Editing Operation 4 JKL 5 MNO 7 6 PQR 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE MULTI JOG COPY MENU TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER MODE MENU COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE MODE GROUP SKIP MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR MENU COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL +, – COMPLETE HDD CLEAR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ CDR HDD EDITING TEXT/TIME TRACK NO. POWER HDD STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO ■ Editing during the stop mode ■ Editing during playback 1. Press HDD to select the HDD. 2. Press MENU. Press MULTI JOG knob to light up the TRACK indicator. 1. Press MENU while the track (in the disc) to be edited The display changes for the menu item selection. 3. Select “Track Edit” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Track Edit L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the editing menu item selection. 5. Select the menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the track editing menu items: • Track Rename • Track Adjust • Track Erase • Part Erase • Track Combine • Track Divide • Track Pack • Add Fade In • Add Fade Out • Track Title 6. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. 7. Start editing by following the setting details (pages 40—51) for each menu item. is being played. The display changes for the editing menu item selection. 2. Select the menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the track editing menu items: • Track Rename • Track Adjust • Track Erase • Part Erase • Track Combine • Track Divide • Add Fade In • Add Fade Out • Track Title 3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. 4. Start editing by following the setting details (pages 40—51) for each menu item. Notes • If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state; – This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having started editing during the stop mode. – This unit returns to the playback if having started editing during playback. • If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode. This unit returns to the stop mode. E-39 105_HD1300(E)39-51 39 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English 8. Press a when all editing has been completed. TRACK EDITING 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Track Rename control) to confirm the new track number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. You can move a track and assign a new number. 8. Press COMPLETE. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Rename” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Rename 001 1? L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Track to be moved The disc number that contains the track to be moved flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to be moved by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be moved. The number of the track to be moved flashes. 4. Select the track to be moved by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be moved. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number that contains the track to be moved, the existing track number, and the new track number. Disc that contains the track to be moved 1 TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Existing track number “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be moved and assigned a new number. The number of the disc and track being played and the new track number appear on the display. Disc being played 001 1≥ TRACK –6 –2 0 Track being played New track number 2. Select the new track number by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). control) to confirm the new track number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The track being played is moved and assigned a new number. Playback resumes from the beginning of the renumbered track. Notes • If the selected new track number is already in use, the tracks following this renumbered track will be automatically upnumbered by one. However, if there is any unused track number, only the tracks up to that number will be up-numbered. • The original number of the track that has been renumbered will be available for future use. New track number 6. Select the new track number by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). E-40 40 –30 –10 R Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 105_HD1300(E)39-51 1 L dB G 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 001 1≥ ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Rename” in step 2 of Disc that contains the track to be moved dB The selected track is renumbered. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 6. Adjust the time length to change the beginning of the Track Adjust You can change the beginning of the track to either earlier or later. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Adjust” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the track to be adjusted L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Press CLEAR to cancel the adjustment. 7. Press COMPLETE. Track to be adjusted The disc number that contains the track to be adjusted flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to be adjusted by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be adjusted. The number of the track to be adjusted flashes. The new track beginning point is set. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Adjust” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be adjusted. The following message appears on the display. The time length to be adjusted 012 Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to be adjusted by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be adjusted. The confirmed track will be played. The following message appears in the display. The time length to be adjusted 012 If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the temporarily changed beginning point of the track according to the time length setting made, and starts repeated playback from the new beginning point to the end of the disc. EDITING Adjust 001 2? track by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The time length can be adjusted by “minute: second: frame”. (Frame is the unit used for values smaller than 1 second. 75 frames make 1 second.) The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be adjusted by pressing t/e or r/y. + 01000 TIME G Playing time of the track Note • If there is no track before the track that is selected and confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this unit returns to the playback. 2. Adjust the time length to change the beginning of the + 01000 TIME Playing time of the track Note • If there is no track before the track that is selected and confirmed, “No Previous” appears on the display, and this unit returns to step 4. track by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The time length can be adjusted by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be adjusted by pressing t/e or r/y. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the temporarily changed beginning point of the track according to the time length setting made, and starts repeated playback from the new beginning point to the end of the disc. Press CLEAR to cancel the adjustment. Continues to next page 105_HD1300(E)39-51 41 02.8.9, 9:32 AM English E-41 TRACK EDITING 3. Press COMPLETE. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote The new track beginning point is set. Playback resumes from the beginning of the adjusted track. Before “Track Adjust” is performed 1 control) to confirm the track to be erased. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. To check the track to be erased, press w/d (w on the remote control). This unit starts to play the track to be erased repeatedly. 2 6. Press COMPLETE. 1 The selected track is erased. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 2 After “Track Adjust” has been performed (The beginning of track 2 is adjusted earlier.) Notes • If the adjusted track includes a part that cannot be copied digitally before adjusting, the adjusted track itself cannot be copied digitally either. • When the emphasis status of the track to be adjusted is different from that of the previous track, the emphasis status of the track to be adjusted takes precedence over that of the previous track. Track Erase ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Erase” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be erased. 2. Press COMPLETE. The track being played is erased. Playback resumes from the beginning of the next track after the erased track. If no track follows the erased track, this unit plays the previous track of the erased track. Note • The number of the track that has been erased will be available for future use. You can erase a selected track. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Erase” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the track to be erased Erase 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Track to be erased The disc number that contains the track to be erased flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to be erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be erased. The number of the track to be erased flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to be erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). E-42 105_HD1300(E)39-51 42 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 7. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Part Erase You can erase part of a selected track. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Part Erase” in step 5 of the “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the track to be partially erased control) to confirm the beginning point of the partial erase. The passage between the temporary ending point of the partial erase (the point that is 10 seconds after the beginning point) and the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary ending point is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Ending point of the partial erase Prt.Er.001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 EDITING 020 Ed 02000 TIME GROUP R Playing time of the track Track to be partially erased The disc number that contains the track to be partially erased flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to be partially erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be partially erased. The number of the track to be partially erased flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to be partially erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be partially erased. The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the temporary beginning point of the partial erase and the temporary beginning point (the point that is 10 seconds elapsed from the beginning of the track) is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 8. Set the ending point of the partial erase by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The ending point of the partial erase can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t /e or r/y. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the ending point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the ending point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point. 9. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the ending point of the partial erase. The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the beginning point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point of the partial erase is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Prt.Er. 005 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Beginning point of the partial erase Pt.Fix 005 St 01000 006 L dB TIME Playing time of the track 6. Set the beginning point of the partial erase by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The beginning point of the partial erase can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the beginning point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the beginning point and the beginning point. –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Caution • During the playback of the passage mentioned above, the sound may missing at the joint between the passage before the beginning point and the passage after the ending point. However, the partially erased track is played properly after the partial erase has been completed. To change the ending point, press CLEAR once to return to step 8. To change the beginning point, press CLEAR twice to return to step 6. 10. Press COMPLETE. The selected part is erased. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. E-43 105_HD1300(E)39-51 43 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English Continues to next page TRACK EDITING ■ Editing during playback 5. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote 1. Select and confirm “Part Erase” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be partially erased. The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the beginning point of the partial erase and the beginning point (the timing you press MENU) is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. control) to confirm the ending point of the partial erase. The passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the beginning point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point of the partial erase is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Prt.Er. Beginning point of the partial erase 005 L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 005 St 01000 TIME Pt.Fix Playing time of the track rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The beginning point of the partial erase can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the beginning point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the point that is 5 seconds before the beginning point and the beginning point. 3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the beginning point of the partial erase. The passage between the temporary ending point of the partial erase (the point that is 10 seconds after the beginning point) and the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary ending point is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Ending point of the partial erase 006 L 2. Set the beginning point of the partial erase by dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Caution • During the playback of the passage mentioned above, the sound may missing at the joint between the passage before the beginning point and the passage after the ending point. However, the partially erased track is played properly after the partial erase has been completed. To change the ending point, press CLEAR once to return to step 4. To change the beginning point, press CLEAR twice to return to step 2. 6. Press COMPLETE. The selected part is erased. Playback resumes from the beginning of the partially erased track. Caution • The minimum length of a track is 4 seconds. It is not possible to create a track that is shorter than 4 seconds by a partial erase. 020 Ed 02000 TIME G Track 1 2 Playing time of the track Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Set the ending point of the partial erase by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The ending point of the partial erase can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t /e or r/y. Track 3 : Part to be erased 1 Repeated passage when setting the beginning point 2 Repeated passage when setting the ending point 3 Repeated passage after confirming the ending point If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the ending point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the ending point and the point that is 5 seconds after the ending point. E-44 105_HD1300(E)39-51 44 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 6. Select the track to be the last in the combination by Track Combine rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). You can combine a series of tracks into one. 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Combine” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the first track to be combined 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Track to be the first in the combination The disc number that contains the first track to be combined flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the first track to be combined by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the first track to be combined. The number of the track to be the first in the combination flashes. 8. Press COMPLETE. The two selected tracks and all those between are combined into one track. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Combine” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be the first track in the combination. The number of the disc and track being played and the number of the track to be the last in the combination appear on the display. Disc being played 001 1- 4. Select the track to be the first in the combination by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be the first in the combination. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number that contains the first track to be combined, the track number to be the first in the combination, and the track number to be the last in the combination. Disc that contains the first track in the combination 2 2 TRACK L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track being played Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 001 1- Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. EDITING Comb. control) to confirm the track to be the last in the combination. Track to be the last in the combination 2. Select the track to be the last in the combination by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be the last in the combination. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The two selected tracks and all those between are combined into one track. Playback resumes from the beginning of the combined track. TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track to be the first in the combination Track to be the last in the combination Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. Notes • When combining a series of tracks, the selected track numbers following the selected first track will be available for future use. • The track title for the first track is effective for the combined track. • If there is any track that cannot be copied digitally among the tracks to be combined, the combined track cannot be copied digitally either. • When tracks with different emphasis status have been combined, the emphasis status of the first track becomes effective for the combined track. 105_HD1300(E)39-51 45 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-45 TRACK EDITING 6. Set the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG Track Divide knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The dividing point can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y. You can divide a track into two at the selected point. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Divide” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the dividing point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the dividing point and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point. Disc that contains the track to be divided Dividing point Track Divide 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Passage to be repeatedly played Track to be divided The disc number that contains the track to be divided flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to be divided by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to be divided. The number of the track to be divided flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to be divided by rotating the MULTI 7. Press COMPLETE. The selected track is divided into two at the set dividing point. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Track Divide” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to be divided. The passage between the dividing point (the timing you press MENU) and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Dividing point JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to be divided. The passage between the temporary dividing point (the point that is 10 seconds elapsed from the beginning of the track) and the point that is 5 seconds after the temporary dividing point is repeatedly played. The following message appears on the display. Dividing point 012 + 01000 TIME Playing time of the track 012 + 01000 TIME G Playing time of the track 2. Set the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The dividing point can be set by “minute: second: frame”. The unit to be set is flashing. Move the flash to the unit to be set by pressing t/e or r/y. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit searches for the dividing point according to the setting made, and starts repeated playback of the passage between the dividing point and the point that is 5 seconds after the dividing point. Dividing point Track Passage to be repeatedly played Continues to next page E-46 105_HD1300(E)39-51 46 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 3. Press COMPLETE. The track being played is divided into two at the set dividing point. Playback resumes from the beginning of the second track of the two divided tracks. You can re-organize the track numbers by eliminating unused track numbers, that have been created by changing track numbers or erasing tracks. 1. Select and confirm “Track Pack” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Pack 001 ? EDITING Cautions • The minimum length of a track is 4 seconds. It is not possible to create a track that is shorter than 4 seconds by dividing a track. • One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. If the disc already contains 99 tracks, “Track No.Full” appears on the display. Track Pack L Note • The track numbers following the divided track will be upnumbered by one. However, if there is any unused track number, only the tracks up to that number will be up-numbered. Before “Track Divide” is performed 1 2 4 5 6 dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Disc on which unused track numbers are to be eliminated 2. Select the disc on which unused track numbers are to be eliminated by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc on which unused track numbers are to be eliminated. Divided into two 1 2 3 4 5 6 After “Track Divide” has been performed (dividing a track into two) : Space not being used Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The track numbers are re-organized by eliminating unused track numbers. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Before “Track Pack” is performed 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 6 5 6 After “Track Pack” has been performed (Unused track numbers have been eliminated.) : Unused track numbers 105_HD1300(E)39-51 47 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-47 TRACK EDITING 6. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) Add Fade In You can add fade-in at the beginning of a track. The beginning of the track is played with gradually rising level when fade-in has been added. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Add Fade In” in step 5 of “Editing 7. Press COMPLETE. Disc that contains the track to add fade-in The fade-in is added to the beginning of the selected track for the selected length. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts repeated playback of the beginning of the track with a fade-in of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5 seconds. Press CLEAR to cancel the setting. during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Fd.In to set the fade-in length. The fade-in length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1second steps. GROUP ■ Editing during playback R Track to add fade-in The disc number that contains the track to add fade-in flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to add fade-in by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 1. Select and confirm “Add Fade In” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed to add fade-in to. The beginning of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-in. The following message appears on the display. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to add fade-in. The number of the track to add fade-in flashes. Fade-in length F.In: 3 001 L dB G R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to add fade-in by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to add fade-in. The beginning of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-in. The following message appears on the display. Fade-in length F.In: 3 001 Playing time of the track 2. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to set the fade-in length. The fade-in length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1second steps. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts repeated playback of the beginning of the track with a fade-in of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5 seconds. Press CLEAR to cancel the setting. L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME Continues to next page Playing time of the track E-48 105_HD1300(E)39-51 48 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 3. Press COMPLETE. 4. Select the track to add fade-out by rotating the MULTI The fade-in is added to the beginning of the track being played for the selected length. Playback resumes from the beginning of the track the fade-in has been added to. Add Fade Out 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to add fade-out. The ending of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-out. The following message appears on the display. Fade-out length F.Out: 3 1001 EDITING Notes • Fade-in cannot be added to a track that is shorter than 21 seconds. • The fade-in effect becomes ineffective if the following editing is performed to the track which the fade-in is added to. – Erasing a certain part of the track (Part Erase). – Combining the track (Track Combine). – Dividing the track (Track Divide). – Adjusting the beginning of the track (Track Adjust). • If “Track Adjust” has been performed, the fade-in effect of both the adjusted track and the previous track becomes ineffective. JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). L dB –30 –10 R –6 –2 0 TIME Playing time of the track 6. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to set the fade-out length. The fade-out length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1second steps. You can add fade-out at the end of a track. The end of the track is played with gradually lowering the level when fade-out has been added. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts repeated playback of the ending of the track with a fade-out of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5 seconds. ■ Editing during the stop mode Press CLEAR to cancel the setting. 1. Select and confirm “Add Fade Out” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. Disc that contains the track to add fade-out 7. Press COMPLETE. The fade-out is added to the end of the selected track for the selected length. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Fd.Out 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 Continues to next page GROUP R Track to add fade-out The disc number that contains the track to add fade-out flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to add fade-out by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to add fade-out. The number of the track to add fade-out flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 105_HD1300(E)39-51 49 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-49 TRACK EDITING ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Add Fade Out” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The ending of the track for 8 seconds is repeatedly played with a 3-second (initial setting) fade-out. The following message appears on the display. Fade-out length –30 –10 R –6 –2 0 ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Track Title” in step 5 of “Editing Disc that contains the track to assign a title to L dB You can assign a title to a track. during the stop mode” on page 39. The following message appears on the display. F.Out: 3 1001 G Track Title TIME Playing time of the track Title 001 1? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R 2. Rotate MULTI JOG knob (+/– on the remote control) to set the fade-out length. The fade-out length can be set in the 1 to 10 second range by 1second steps. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts repeated playback of the ending of the track with a fade-out of the length set in above step, with extra portion for further 5 seconds. Press CLEAR to cancel the setting. 3. Press COMPLETE. The fade-out is added to the ending of the track being played for the selected length. Playback resumes from the beginning of the track the fade-out has been added to. Notes • Fade-out cannot be added to a track that is shorter than 21 seconds. • The fade-out effect becomes ineffective if the following editing is performed to the track which the fade-out is added to. – Erasing a certain part of the track (Part Erase). – Combining the track (Track Combine). – Dividing the track (Track Divide). – Adjusting the beginning of the track (Track Adjust). • If “Track Adjust” has been performed, the fade-out effect of both the adjusted track and the previous track becomes ineffective. Track to assign a title to The disc number that contains the track to assign a title to flashes. 2. Select the disc that contains the track to assign a title to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc that contains the track to assign a title to. When the disc has been confirmed, the disc number that contains the track to assign a title to flashes. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the track to assign a title to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the track to assign a title to. The following message appears on the display. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The cursor flashes. If the selected track already has a title, the title appears on the display. Continues to next page E-50 105_HD1300(E)39-51 50 02.6.24, 6:51 PM TRACK EDITING 6. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See description on right for entering procedure. 7. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been entered. The title is assigned to the selected track. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 1. Select and confirm “Track Title” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 39. The track being played is confirmed for assigning the title to. The following message appears on the display. L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The cursor flashes. If the selected track already has a title, the title appears on the display. 2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See description on right for entering procedure. 3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been entered. The title is assigned to the track being played. Playback starts from the beginning of the track with the title assigned to. 1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise. When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character you wish to use for the title. 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected character. The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters. ■ Entering the title characters by using the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control EDITING ■ Editing during playback ■ Entering the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob 1. Select the character to be used for the title by using the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to select the desired symbol. 2. Select the next character by pressing one of the alphabetical/numeric buttons. The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next space. Note • If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new character is inserted in front of the existing character. ■ Correcting the characters Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/ e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter and confirm the new character. 105_HD1300(E)39-51 51 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-51 DISC EDITING You can do various editing operations on the discs that have been recorded on the HDD. Disc Editing Operation 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE MULTI JOG COPY MENU TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE REC ERASE MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR MENU COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE A.M.Q.R. ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL +, – COMPLETE HDD CLEAR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ CDR HDD HDD STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO ■ Editing during the stop mode ■ Editing during playback 1. Press HDD to select the HDD to edit. 2. Press MENU. Press MULTI JOG knob to light up the GROUP indicator. 1. Press MENU while the disc to be edited is being The display changes for the menu item selection. 3. Select “Disc Edit” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Disc Edit L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the editing menu item selection. 5. Select the desired editing menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the disc editing menu items: • Disc Rename • Disc Erase • Disc Combine • Disc Divide • Disc Pack • Disc Title 6. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. 7. Start editing by following the detailed steps (pages played. The display changes for the editing menu item selection. 2. Select the desired editing menu item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The followings are the disc editing menu items: • Disc Rename • Disc Erase • Disc Combine • Disc Divide • Disc Title 3. Press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The selected item is confirmed. Then editing operation can be started. 4. Start editing by following the detailed steps (pages 53—57) for each menu item. Notes • If MENU is pressed during editing, entry of the selection is canceled, and then this unit returns to the following state; – This unit returns to the editing menu item selection if having started editing during the stop mode. – This unit returns to the playback of the disc to be edited if having started editing during playback. • If a is pressed during editing, all entry of the selection is canceled, and this unit returns to the stop mode. 53—57) for each menu item. 8. Press a when all editing has been completed. This unit returns to the stop mode. E-52 106_HD1300(E)52-59 52 02.6.24, 6:51 PM DISC EDITING ■ Editing during playback Disc Rename 1. Select and confirm “Disc Rename” in step 2 of You can move a disc and assign a new number. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Disc Rename” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. L 001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 Dsc001≥002 dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Disc being played Disc to be moved The disc number to be moved flashes. New disc number 2. Select the new disc number to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 2. Select the disc to be moved by rotating the MULTI 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). control) to confirm the new disc number. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. control) to confirm the disc to be moved. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc number to be moved and new number. Dsc001≥002 L dB G Disc to be moved –30 –10 GROUP R EDITING Rename “Editing during playback” on page 52. The disc being played is confirmed to be moved and assigned a new number. The number of the disc being played and the new disc number appear on the display. –6 –2 0 GROUP R New disc number Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the new disc number to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 4. Press COMPLETE. The disc being played has been moved to and assigned a new number. Playback resumes from the beginning of the moved disc. Notes • If the selected new disc number is already in use, the disc numbers following this renumbered disc will be automatically upnumbered by one. However, if there is any unused disc number, only the discs up to that number will be up-numbered. • The original number of the disc that has been renumbered will be available for future use. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the new disc number. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 6. Press COMPLETE. The selected disc has been moved to and assigned a new number. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. 106_HD1300(E)52-59 53 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-53 DISC EDITING Disc Erase Disc Combine You can erase a selected disc. You can combine a series of discs into one. ■ Editing during the stop mode ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Disc Erase” in step 5 of “Editing 1. Select and confirm “Disc Combine” in step 5 of during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. Erase “Editing during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. Combine 001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 Disc to be erased The number of the disc to be erased flashes. 2. Select the disc to be erased by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to be erased. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. The selected disc is erased. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. dB during playback” on page 52. The disc being played is confirmed to be erased. –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Disc to be the first in the combination The disc number to be the first in the combination flashes. 2. Select the disc to be the first track in the combination by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to be the first in the combination. The display scrolls to the left to indicate the disc numbers to be the first and the last in the combination. 001 -002 ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Disc Erase” in step 2 of “Editing 001? L GROUP R L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Disc to be the first in the combination Disc to be the last in the combination Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 2. Press COMPLETE. The disc being played is erased. Playback resumes from the beginning of the next disc after the erased disc. If no disc follows the erased disc, this unit plays the previous disc of the erased disc. Note • The number of the erased disc will be available for future use. 4. Select the disc to be the last in the combination by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to be the last in the combination. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 6. Press COMPLETE. The two selected discs and all those between are combined into one disc. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Continues to next page E-54 106_HD1300(E)52-59 54 02.6.24, 6:51 PM DISC EDITING ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Disc Combine” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 52. The disc being played is confirmed to be the first disc in the combination. The number of the disc being played and the number of the disc to be the last in the combination appear on the display. 001 -002 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R You can divide a disc into two at the selected point. ■ Editing during the stop mode 1. Select and confirm “Disc Divide” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. Divide 001? L dB Disc being played rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to be the last in the combination. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. –6 –2 0 GROUP R Disc to be the last in the combination 2. Select the disc to be the last in the combination by –30 –10 EDITING G Disc Divide Disc to be divided The number of the disc to be divided flashes. 2. Select the disc to be divided by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to be divided. “Div.from” and the dividing point (the number of the track to be the first after dividing) appear on the display. 4. Press COMPLETE. The two selected discs and all those between are combined into one disc. Playback resumes from the beginning of the combined disc. Cautions • One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. When the total track number on a disc exceeds 99, “Track No.Full” appears on the display. • The maximum length of one disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. When the total time of the discs to be combined exceeds 99 minutes 59 seconds, “No Enough Spc” appears on the display. Notes • When combining a series of discs, the selected disc numbers following the selected first disc will be available for future use. • The disc title for the first disc is effective for the combined disc. Div. from 4? TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track to be the first after dividing Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Select the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the dividing point. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 6. Press COMPLETE. The selected disc is divided into two at the selected dividing point. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Continues to next page 106_HD1300(E)52-59 55 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-55 DISC EDITING ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Disc Divide” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 52. The disc being played is confirmed to be divided. “Div.from” and the dividing point (the number of the track to be the first after dividing) appear on the display. Div. from TRACK dB –30 –10 –6 –2 You can re-organize the disc numbers by eliminating unused disc numbers that have been created by changing disc numbers or erasing discs. 1. Select and confirm “Disc Pack” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. 4? L G Disc Pack 0 R Pack ? Track to be the first after dividing L dB 2. Select the dividing point by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the dividing point. Press CLEAR to cancel the confirmed selection. 4. Press COMPLETE. Caution • The HDD can contain up to 999 discs. If the HDD already contains 999 discs, “Disc No.Full” appears on the display. Note • The disc numbers following the divided disc will be up-numbered by one. However, if there is any unused disc number, only the discs up to that number will be up-numbered. 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 E-56 56 6 5 6 After “Disc Pack” has been performed (Unused disc numbers have been eliminated.) : Unused disc numbers After “Disc Divide” has been performed (dividing a disc into two) : Space not being used 106_HD1300(E)52-59 0 The disc numbers are re-organized by eliminating unused disc numbers. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. Divided into two 2 –2 2. Press COMPLETE. Before “Disc Divide” is performed 1 –6 Before “Disc Pack” is performed The disc being played is divided into two at the set dividing point. Playback resumes from the beginning of the second disc of the two divided discs. 1 –30 –10 R 02.6.24, 6:51 PM DISC EDITING 2. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG Disc Title knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See description below for entering procedure. You can assign a title to a recorded disc. ■ Editing during the stop mode 3. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been 1. Select and confirm “Disc Title” in step 5 of “Editing during the stop mode” on page 52. The following message appears on the display. 001? L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R Disc to assign a title to The number of the disc to assign a title to flashes. 2. Select the disc to assign a title to by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the disc to assign a title to. The following message appears on the display. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The cursor flashes. ■ Entering the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob 1. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise. When the MULTI JOG knob is rotated clockwise, characters appear in the order of alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, numbers, and symbols. Select the character you wish to use for the title. EDITING Title entered. The title is assigned to the disc being played. Playback resumes from the beginning of the disc with the title assigned to. 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob to confirm the selected character. The cursor moves to the next space. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is complete. A title can contain up to 32 characters. ■ Entering the title characters by using the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control 1. Select the character to be used for the title by using If the selected disc already has a title, the title appears on the display. 4. Enter the title characters by using the MULTI JOG knob or the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. See description on right for entering procedure. 5. Press COMPLETE when all the characters have been entered. The title is assigned to the selected disc. This unit returns to the editing menu item selection. ■ Editing during playback 1. Select and confirm “Disc Title” in step 2 of “Editing during playback” on page 52. The disc being played is confirmed for assigning the title to. The following message appears on the display. L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R the alphabetical/numeric buttons on the remote control. Alphabetical capital letters, alphabetical lower case letters, and numbers switch each time the buttons are pressed. To create a space, press SPACE. To use a symbol, press SYMBOL to select the desired symbol. 2. Select the next character by pressing one of the alphabetical/numeric buttons. The cursor automatically moves to the next space. When the same button is used, press y to move the cursor to the next space. Note • If a new character is entered on the existing character, the new character is inserted in front of the existing character. ■ Correcting the characters Move the cursor to the character to be corrected by pressing t/ e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). Press CLEAR to cancel the character before a new character is entered. Then enter and confirm the new character. The cursor flashes. If the selected disc already has a title, the title appears on the display. 106_HD1300(E)52-59 57 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-57 UNDO FUNCTION You can cancel an operation and the result of a previous editing step on this unit (Undo function). OPEN/CLOSE COPY MULTI JOG TIMER REC REC MENU A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE INPUT ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE MENU CLEAR MODE MENU MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL COMPLETE COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL COMPLETE CLEAR OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. ENTER +, – COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ COMPLETE 1. Press MENU to display the menu item selection while this unit is in the stop mode. 2. Select “Undo” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Undo STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO Notes • The undo function does not apply to the addition of fade-in or fade-out to a track because it can be canceled at any time. • The undo function does not apply to assigning a title to an album, track or disc. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to display “Undo?”. 4. Press COMPLETE. The previous editing operation and result are canceled. The undo function does not work if any of the following operations has been performed after the editing operation. • After the editing operation, a recording has been made, or this unit has been set in the recording pause mode to start recording. • After the editing operation, a copy has been made, or this unit has been set in the copy standby mode to start copying. • Further editing operations have been performed. • The HDD has been formatted. The following message appears on the display if the undo function does not work. No Undo data L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R E-58 106_HD1300(E)52-59 58 02.6.24, 6:51 PM BOOKMARK While playing a track, you can place a bookmark temporarily on the track. Bookmark is convenient for immediate playback of the desired track and for creating a new album since the tracks with bookmarks are stored as a playlist. 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO BOOKMARK TRACK NO./BOOKMARK CLEAR MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER GROUP SKIP TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL EDITING COPY INPUT REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE HDD ANALOG REC LEVEL CDR OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX ■ To place a bookmark ■ To cancel a bookmark Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) to place a bookmark during playback of the track. The MARK indicator lights on the display. Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the track. The MARK indicator turns off on the display. MARK • • • • • ■ To cancel all bookmarks on the operating drive G Notes When the track with a bookmark is selected, the MARK indicator lights on the display regardless of whether it is during playback or stopped. You can create one list of the tracks with bookmarks on each the HDD and a CD. The list of the tracks on the HDD with bookmarks will be stored on the HDD. However, only one list of tracks with bookmarks can be stored. If you wish to have more than one list, copy the playlist in the album (see page 32). The list of the tracks on a CD with bookmarks will be erased if the CD is taken out or the power of this unit is turned off. You can create a new album by copying the list of tracks with bookmarks. Select “Mark” as the group to be copied. See “Album Copy” on page 32. Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the front panel while this unit is in the stop mode. The following message appears on the display, and all bookmarks are canceled. Bookmark Clr L MARK dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R 106_HD1300(E)52-59 59 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-59 COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC Copying a Whole Group (Disc, Album or Bookmark) You can copy all tracks in a whole group of discs, albums or a bookmark. 1,3 4 2 1,3 5 MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR 4 7 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL 5 HDD CLEAR CDR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 7 1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray. 2. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CDRW disc without finalization on the disc tray. Place the CD-R or CD-RW disc correctly aligned in the recessed area of the disc tray with its recordable side facing down. 6 MAX 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO When reading the information has been completed, the display changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation. When copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc without finalization The number of recorded tracks Total recorded time 14 6817 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR 1 L dB R GROUP CDR When copying onto a new CD-R or CD-RW disc New Disc L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR 3. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to 0 close the disc tray. L dB Note • The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of the disc tray gently. If a CD-R or CD-RW disc without finalization is loaded, this unit starts playback of that CD-R or CD-RW disc. Press a to stop playback. R This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of a CD-R or a CD-RW disc) when a CD-R or a CD-RW disc is loaded. It takes approximately 10 to15 seconds to complete the reading. The following message appears on the display during the reading. Reading L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R E-60 107_HD1300(E)60-71 60 02.6.24, 6:51 PM GROUP CDR 6 COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC 4. Press COPY twice. 6. Start copying. The following message appears on the display, and this unit enters in the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. 003 1“ 1 001 REC L HDD “ CD-RW REC L ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 003 1“ 1 ALL SYNC ANLG –6 –2 0 R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR Notes • OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc depending on its recording condition. It takes approximately 15 seconds to complete the adjustment. 000 –30 –10 dB GROUP CDR REC L dB ALL SYNC ANLG GROUP GROUP CDR OPC Adjust REC L Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the group on the HDD to be copied. When a disc is selected: 003 1“ 1 000 REC L ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 003 1“ 1 CDR 000 REC L ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR When a bookmark is selected: Mrk 1“ 1 000 REC L MARK ALL SYNC ANLG dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –30 –10 –6 –2 R 0 CDR When the adjustment has been completed, and the message above turns off on the display, copying automatically starts. • The progress of elapsed time for the track being copied may vary by the data processing inside this unit. To cancel copying, press a. GROUP When an album is selected: ALBM dB GROUP CDR Caution • If copying is canceled by a being pressed, only the data that has been recorded on the CD-R or CD-RW disc before the cancellation remains on the disc. When “Digital Move” (see page 65) is selected, the original data on the HDD which has already been copied to a CD-R or CD-RW disc will be deleted. When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. 7. Press FINALIZE to start finalization. See page 70 for finalization. Text data If the copied data contains text data that can be copied such as a disc title, the TOC indicator flashes when copying is completed. If you attempt to open the disc tray by pressing v (OPEN/ CLOSE on the remote control), “TEXT Save ?” appears on the display. • In order to copy the text data, perform finalization procedure. • In order to open the disc tray without copying the text data, press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) again. However once the disc tray is opened, text data cannot be copied. 107_HD1300(E)60-71 61 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-61 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC ALL SYNC ANLG 5. Select the group on the HDD to be copied. GROUP COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC Copying Favorite Tracks on the HDD 1 2 6 1 1 4 7 COPY 6 9 MULTI JOG PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER 4 TEXT/TIME INPUT REC 4 ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. 7 ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL CLEAR ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 9 3,8 1. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CDRW disc without finalization. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. If there are tracks with bookmarks already, go to step 6. 2. Press HDD to select HDD. 3. Start playback of a track recorded on the HDD. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start playback. 4. Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) while your favorite track is being played. The MARK indicator lights up on the display. MARK G MAX 5 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ HDD 2 CDR +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO To cancel all bookmarks Press CLEAR as pressing TRACK NO./BOOKMARK on the front panel while this unit is in the stop mode. “Bookmark Clr” appears on the display and all bookmarks are canceled. 6. Press COPY twice. This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. 7. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select “Mrk”. Mrk 1“ 1 000 REC L MARK ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR 8. Start copying. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. Mrk 1“ 1 001 REC L Press t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control) to skip tracks and repeat this operation. To cancel a bookmark Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) to cancel the bookmark during playback of the track. The MARK indicator turns off on the display. 5. When the bookmarks have been placed to all favorite tracks, press a to stop playback. Tracks are listed and stored in order that the bookmarks have been placed. MARK ALL SYNC ANLG –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. 9. Press FINALIZE to perform finalization. E-62 62 dB Note • OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc depending on its recording condition. It takes approximately 15 seconds to complete the adjustment. When the adjustment is completed and “OPC Adjust” disappears, copying will automatically start. See page 70 for finalization. 107_HD1300(E)60-71 3,8 5 02.6.24, 6:51 PM COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC High Quality Copying You can make your own CD with high quality sound with the Audio Master Quality Recording mode. Cautions • Audio Master Quality Recording mode can be used only for copying from the HDD on a new CD-R disc. • Recordable time is 63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc, and 68 minutes for a 79-minute CD-R disc. • Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used for recording from an external component directly to a CD-R disc. 1 2 1 1 3 MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 5 4 1. Load a new CD-R disc. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD-R disc with its recordable side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. 2. Press COPY twice. This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. 3. Select the group on the HDD to be copied. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the group on the HDD to be copied. 4. Press A.M.Q.R. The A.M.Q.R. indicator lights up on the display. 3 HDD CLEAR CDR ENTER 5 MAX 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO Cautions • Once copying starts, no button operation is effective until copying is completed. • Never turn off the power of this unit or unplug the AC power cord during copying. When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. Cautions • When total time of the group to be copied exceeds recordable time on a CD-R disc (63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc and 68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc), the following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used. A.M.Q.R. No Enough Spc A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M SYNC 5. Start copying. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. AMQR 1% A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M SYNC REC L dB –30 –10 R The copying conditions are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Move” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: 4x speed –6 –2 0 REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR • If you select the album with its tracks’ level adjusted as the group to be copied, the following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used. GROUP CDR Can't Tr.Lev. A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M SYNC REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R GROUP CDR • When a CD-R disc other than a 74-minute, 79-minute or 4x writing compatible CD-R disc is loaded, or a CD-RW disc is loaded on this unit, the following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used. Unavailable REC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP CDR E-63 63 02.7.26, 4:19 PM English A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M SYNC 107_HD1300(E)60-71 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC 2 4 4 COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC Advanced Operations ■ Setting the copying mode This unit provides various copying modes. Choose the one that suits your needs. Initial setting: All Synchro MODE OPEN/CLOSE MULTI JOG COPY TIMER REC REC MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TRACK NO. COMPLETE ERASE CLEAR TEXT/TIME BOOKMARK INPUT TRACK NO. WRITE DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY MODE INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL MENU MODE COAXIAL COMPLETE ANALOG MIN MAX +, – CLEAR ENTER ENTER 1 1. Press MODE while this unit is in the copy standby mode. You can select the copying mode. ABC 2 control) to select the copying mode. Choose one of the modes listed below. 4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote 6. Select a group and track to start copying from. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob to select a group and track to start copying with. Select a group while the GROUP indicator lights and a track while the TRACK indicator lights. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob to switch the indicators. Full Auto (Full auto-synchronized copying mode) This mode automatically performs finalization after all synchronized copying is complete. A CD-R disc can be played as a CD as soon as finalization has been completed. Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized copying mode) This mode copies the set number of tracks at the same time as the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources. 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the copying mode selected. If “All Synchro” or “Full Auto” is confirmed, this unit returns to the copy standby mode. If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message appears on the display. Go to step 4. How many ? 1 REC L SYNC ANLG R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDR E-64 107_HD1300(E)60-71 64 GHI control) to confirm the number selected. This unit returns to the copy standby mode. All Synchro (All-synchronized copying mode) This mode copies all of the material from a single audio source at the same time as the source programs are being played. Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded. MULT 3 JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The number can be selected in the 1 to 99 tracks range. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote dB DEF 02.7.26, 4:20 PM COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC ■ Copying menu setting ■ Copy Method You can make detailed settings on the menu for your copying. Follow the steps described below for menu setting. Setting of the copying method. Copying may fail if the setting for “Copy Method” is not correctly made. MULTI JOG MENU Copy Method REC MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER L TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR BOOKMARK ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 R –6 –2 0 CDR Initial setting: Analog Copy DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX TIMER REC REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT Digital Copy This method always makes digital copies. Copying is not possible if the tracks are copy protected by the SCMS standard (see page 5). ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE MODE MENU MENU COMPLETE +, – CLEAR ENTER ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the copy standby mode. You can start setting the copying menu. 2. Select the menu item to be set by rotating the MULTI Auto Dig/Anlg Digital and analog copying are automatically switched depending on the track. If digital copying is prohibited by the SCMS standard (see page 5), an analog copy is made. For those tracks that can be digitally copied, a digital copy is made. Notes • In analog copying, the data may be copied at a lower sound level. • The settings is stored in the memory and applied to future copying. JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The copying menu contains 3 items as follows: • Copy Method (setting the copying method) • Copy Level (setting the copying level) • Copy Speed (setting the copying speed) 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the menu item to be adjusted. 4. Adjust the parameter for each item by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). See the further steps for detailed instructions on parameter adjustment for each item. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC Digital Move The data is moved from the HDD to the CD. Therefore, the track or group data will be deleted from the HDD after they have been moved to the CD-R or CD-RW disc by this method. OPEN/CLOSE COPY Analog Copy This method always makes analog copies. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the setting when adjustment has been completed. 6. Press MENU to close the menu. This unit returns to the copy standby mode. 107_HD1300(E)60-71 65 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English E-65 COPYING FROM THE HDD ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC ■ Copy Level ■ Copy Speed Setting of the sound level for copying. Sound level adjustment is not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the copying sound level to suit you needs. Setting of the copying speed. Copy Speed REC L Copy Level ALL SYNC ANLG REC dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDR L ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Initial setting: Best Effort CDR The following message appears on the display when “Copy Level” setting is confirmed in step 3 for “Copying menu setting” on page 65. Level 0.0dB REC LEVEL L ALL SYNC ANLG dB –30 –10 –6 –2 R 0 CDR 1. Adjust the copying sound level by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Adjustment is possible in the –12dB to +12dB range by 0.4dB steps. 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the copying level setting. Notes • Level adjustment is not possible during copying. • If the red part on the peak level meter lights at the loudest sound levels, stop copying to adjust the copying level, and then resume copying. GROUP CDR • If the level is adjusted, copying speed is made at maximum 2x speed. Best Effort Copying is made at the maximum speed possible depending on the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings, and the conditions of a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • When “Auto Dig/Anlg” is selected: maximum 2x speed • When “Digital Move” is selected: maximum 8x speed (CD-R) maximum 4x speed (CD-RW) • When “Digital Copy” is selected: maximum 8x speed (CD-R) maximum 4x speed (CD-RW) • When “Analog Copy” is selected: maximum 2x speed 1x Copy Copying is always made at 1x speed despite the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings. 2x Copy Copying is always made at 2x speed despite the “Copy Method” and “Copy Level” settings. Notes • Depending on the condition of the CD-R or CD-RW disc, the copy speed may drop automatically even when “Best Effort” is selected. • Select “2x Copy” or “1x Copy” when copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc that does not support high-speed copying. • The settings is stored in the memory and applied to future copying. E-66 107_HD1300(E)60-71 66 02.6.24, 6:51 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC You can record from an external component directly to a CD-R or CD-RW disc. Following is an explanation for digital recording from an external CD player connected to the DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) jacks on this unit. Note • Before starting to record, check the remaining time available for recording on the CD-R or CD-RW disc (see page 11). 1 1 1 4 4 MULTI JOG PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR COPY 9 TIMER REC TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE REC MENU DIGITAL REC LEVEL PHONES COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL ENTER ANALOG MIN MIN MAX 2 9 1. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-R or CDRW disc without finalization. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. 2. Press REC. OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc depending on its recording condition. It takes approximately 15 seconds to complete the adjustment. OPC Adjust dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR If this unit determines that OPC is not needed for the disc loaded, “Standby” flashes on the display. Standby REC L dB SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR The following message appears on the display and this unit enters the recording pause mode. 1 PQR 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK 2 REPEAT RANDOM INTRO 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO GROUP SKIP 3 4 4 4 HDD 6 6 8 CDR 4. Adjust the recording level. The adjustment of the digital recording level is not normally necessary. However it is possible to adjust the recording level to suit your needs. Play the loudest passage (highest sound level) of the source to be recorded. By pressing MENU, the display changes for the level adjustment. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to adjust the recording level. When the adjustment is completed, press MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the adjusted recording level. REC L SYNC MAX 63 8 6 000 REC When making an analog recording... Rotate the ANALOG REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level. Note • Adjust the recording level so that the red part on the peak level meter does not light at the loudest sound levels. COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC REC 7 TRACK NO. WRITE BOOKMARK CDR 5 MNO ERASE POWER HDD JKL OPEN/CLOSE A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER 4 See “Adjusting the Recording Level” on page 24 for details. 5. Select a recording mode. If you wish to record only one track, select “Multi Synchro” and set to 1 track for the number of tracks to be recorded. L dB SYNC –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR Note • If you leave this unit in the recording pause mode for approximately 5 minutes, this unit returns to the stop mode automatically. If you wish to start and stop recording, and place track markers automatically, select “All Synchro”. If you wish to automatically make finalization on a CD-R or CD-RW disc as well, select “Full Auto”. See “Setting the recording mode” on page 69 for details. 3. Select the input source to be recorded. When making a digital recording from an external CD player, press INPUT until the OPTICAL or COAXIAL indicator lights up. E-67 107_HD1300(E)60-71 67 02.6.24, 6:51 PM English When making an analog recording... Press INPUT until the ANALOG indicator lights up. RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC 6. Start recording. 9. When all recordings are completed, press FINALIZE Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to start recording. 1 001 REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR Note • In the multi-synchronized, all-synchronized, or full autosynchronized recording mode, this unit automatically starts recording when the source component starts playback. 7. Start playback on an external CD player. Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop recording temporarily. “Wait” flashes on the display. The CDR mark starts flashing in a few seconds and the track number is advanced to the next. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume recording. 8. Press a to stop recording. “Wait” flashes on the display. The number of recorded tracks and the total recorded time are indicated on the display in a few seconds, and then the first track number of the recorded tracks is indicated on the display in a few seconds. Wait REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR 14 6817 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R to start finalization. See page 70 for finalization. GROUP CD TEXT Even if a CD with CD TEXT that can be copied is recorded from an external player, CD TEXT will not be copied. In order to copy CD TEXT, copy it on the HDD (page 14) first, then copy it on a CD-R or CD-RW disc (page 60), or duplicate a CD (page 72). IMPORTANT • Never turn off the power of this unit during recording. Recording may not be correctly made, or the CD-R or CD-RW disc may be damaged. • If the power of this unit is turned off during recording on a CD-R disc, recording may become impossible or the CD-R disc may not be played back normally because information is not written in the PMA (Program Memory Area). • During recording, make sure that this unit is not subjected to shock or vibration as it may cause skips or jumps to be included in the recording. Notes • It is recommended to record a program such as a cable TV broadcasting onto the HDD first. Then edit it on the HDD and copy it on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. You can make your original CD with less mistakes. See page 20 for recording onto the HDD and page 29 for editing. • This unit can duplicate a CD quickly. See page 72 for duplicating a CD. CDR 1 L dB R GROUP CDR E-68 107_HD1300(E)60-71 68 02.6.24, 6:52 PM RECORDING FROM AN EXTERNAL COMPONENT ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC Advanced Operations ■ Setting the recording mode This unit provides various recording modes. Choose the one that suits your needs. Initial setting: Track Synchro MODE MULTI JOG 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE MENU CLEAR BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX control) to confirm the recording mode selected. If “Manual”, “Track Synchro”, “All Synchro” or “Full Auto” is confirmed, this unit returns to the recording pause mode. If “Multi Synchro” is confirmed, the following message appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 4 and 5. How many ? 1 REC L MULT SYNC dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDR R OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT When “Auto Period” is confirmed, the following message appears on the display. Make a setting following steps 6—9. REC ERASE Period ? TRACK NO. WRITE AUTO PRD MODE 300 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R MENU REC L dB CDR TIME MODE COMPLETE +, – CLEAR 4. Select the number of tracks by rotating the MULTI ENTER ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 1. Press MODE while this unit is in the recording pause mode. The recording mode can be selected. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select the recording mode. Choose one of the modes listed below. Manual (Manual recording mode) All the recording operations including starting, stopping, track marking and finalization are performed manually. Track Synchro (Track-synchronized recording) Recording is started and stopped manually. Track markers are automatically placed by detecting track intervals. Multi Synchro (Multi-synchronized recording mode) This mode records the set number of tracks at the same time as the source programs are being played. The number of tracks to be recorded can be set in the range of 1 to 99 tracks. This mode is convenient to record a mix of tracks from different sources. All Synchro (All-synchronized recording mode) This mode records all of the material from a single audio source at the same time as the source programs are being played. Track markers are automatically placed between the tracks being recorded. JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The number can be set in the 1 to 99 tracks range. 5. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the number of tracks to be set. This unit returns to the recording pause mode. 6. Select the time length between track markers by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). The time length can be set in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes range by 10-seconds steps. 7. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the time length between the selected track markers. The following message appears on the display. The total recording time can be set. Total? AUTO PRD 0h 4m COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC A.M.Q.R. Auto Period (Auto-period recording mode) This mode makes recording for the set amount of time while placing track markers at the set time interval. The length between track markers can be adjusted in the 10 seconds to 30 minutes range by 10-second steps. This mode is convenient to search for material recorded from FM broadcasts. REC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDR TIME 8. Select the total recording time by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 9. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the total recording time. This unit returns to the recording pause mode. Full Auto (Full auto-synchronized recording mode) This mode automatically performs finalization after all synchronized recording is complete. A CD-R disc can be played as a CD as soon as finalization has been completed. 107_HD1300(E)60-71 69 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-69 FINALIZATION Finalization is the process that concludes recording, and allows a CD-R disc to be played on a standard CD player or a CD-RW disc to be played on a CD-RW-compatible player. 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE COPY MULTI JOG ER TEXT/TIME MODE TRACK NO. COMPLETE TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE PUSH ENTER MENU 2 CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL MODE MENU COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL COMPLETE OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL ANALOG MIN HDD MAX CLEAR 1 2 3 2 1. Load a recorded CD-R or CD-RW disc without finalization. CDR ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 3 2 +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO When finalization is completed, the TOC indicator lights up and this unit enters the stop mode. 2. Press FINALIZE. TOC CDR Finalize OK ? When a CD-R disc has been finalized L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR TOC CDRW To cancel finalization, press a. If you wish to make finalization at slower speed, press and hold FINALIZE for approximately 3 seconds. The following message appears on the display and this unit enters the slow finalization mode. Slow Fnlz OK? L dB –30 –10 R –6 –2 0 CDR 3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start finalization. Finalizing REC CDR When a CD-RW disc has been finalized Cautions • Further recording is not possible onto a finalized CD-R disc. Make sure that all recordings have been completed before finalization. • Make sure a CD-R or CD-RW disc has no scratches, dust, fingerprints or similar marks before loading. Wipe a CD-R or CD-RW disc if there is any dust on it. See page 4 for handling of a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • Once the finalization process has started, no other operation is possible until finalization is completed. • Never turn off the power or disconnect the power cord during finalization. The level meter shows the finalization progress on the display. CDR When starting finalization CDR During finalization E-70 107_HD1300(E)60-71 70 02.6.24, 6:52 PM ERASING A CD-RW DISC You can erase the data recorded on a CD-RW disc. New recordings can be made in the space created by erasing. The following 4 types of erasing are possible with this unit. ■ Last Track Erase ■ TOC Erase This operation erases the last track on a disc. “Last Track Erase” cannot be performed if a CD-RW disc has been finalized, or only one track has been recorded on the disc. This operation is only available on a CD-RW disc that has been finalized. After the Table of Contents (TOC) has been erased, the effects of finalization are defeated, and further recording is possible. 1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased. 2. Press ERASE. 1. Load the CD-RW disc that has been finalized. 2. Press ERASE. The following message appears on the display. “Erase TOC ?” appears on the display. Erase Last ? TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDRW Erase TOC ? L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Erase 2- 9? TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Track to start erasing from CDRW Last track To cancel erasing, press a. 3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing. “Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the erasing progress. 4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has been completed. TOC CDRW To cancel erasing, press a. 3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing. “Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the erasing progress. 4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has been completed. Note • The TOC indicator turns off when “TOC Erase” has been completed. ■ Disc Erase This operation erases all information recorded on a CD-RW disc. 1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased. 2. Press and hold ERASE for approximately 2 seconds. ■ All Track Erase This operation erases all tracks recorded on a CD-RW disc. TOC will be erased also if a CD-RW disc has been finalized. 1. Load the CD-RW disc to be erased. 2. Press ERASE repeatedly until “Erase ALL ?” appears on the display. “Erase Disc ?” appears on the display. Erase Disc ? L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDRW To cancel erasing, press a. 3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing. Erase ALL ? L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDRW “Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the erasing progress. 4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has To cancel erasing, press a. 3. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start erasing. “Erasing” flashes on the display, and the level meter shows the erasing progress. 4. This unit enters the stop mode when erasing has been completed. been completed. Cautions • Never turn off the power of this unit during erasing. • If “Check Disc” appears on the display during erasing, and erasing stops, there may be dust or damage on the CD-RW disc. Check the CD-RW disc and start the erasing operation again. • Erasing a disc takes approximately 20 minutes. 71 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-71 107_HD1300(E)60-71 COPYING AND RECORDING ONTO A CD-R OR CD-RW DISC dB Go to the next step when erasing only the last track. To erase other tracks as well, select the track number to start erasing from by rotating the MULTI JOG knob. DUPLICATION OF A CD You can quickly duplicate a commercially available CD using this unit. Caution • Duplication may not correctly made on a CD-R or CD-RW disc that does not support high speed writing. In this case, copy a CD onto the HDD first, then perform “Digital Move” on a CD-R or CD-RW disc at 2x or 1x speed. 1,3,6 4 1,3,6 2,6 4 5 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER +10 0 SPACE PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU MODE MENU POWER TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR COMPLETE BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD CDR COPY HDD CLEAR PHONES LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. 5 COAXIAL 1 ANALOG MIN CDR ENTER ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL MIN MAX 1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray. 2. Load the CD to duplicate on the disc tray. MAX ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO When reading the information has been completed, the display changes as follows, and this unit becomes ready for operation. Total number of tracks Place the CD correctly aligned in the recessed area of the disc tray with its label side facing up. Total time 14 6817 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TOC GROUP CD –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TOC GROUP CD R 1 L dB R 4. Press COPY three times. The following message appears on the display, and this unit enters the copy standby mode. Duplication has not been started yet at this stage. Duplicate DUPLCT DIG ALL SYNC REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R TOC CD 3. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. Note • The disc tray can be also closed by pressing the front edge of the disc tray gently. If the disc tray is closed in this way, this unit starts playback of the CD. Press a to stop playback. 1π 1 DUPLCT DIG ALL SYNC This unit starts reading the information (type and capacity of a CD) when a CD is loaded. It takes approximately 10 to 15 seconds. The following message appears on the display during reading. Reading L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R E-72 108_HD1300(E)72-75 72 02.6.24, 6:52 PM 000 L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 REC TOC CD DUPLICATION OF A CD 5. Start copying from the CD onto the HDD. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. The copying conditions are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Copy” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: “Best Effort” Cautions • If copying is canceled by a being pressed, even the data that has been copied before cancellation does not remain on the HDD. • If a track is copy protected by the SCMS standard, that track cannot be copied onto the HDD. When copying from the CD onto the HDD has been completed, the following message appears on the display. DUPLCT DIG ALL SYNC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R REC When copying has been completed, the HDD operation automatically stops, and finalization of the CD-R or CD-RW disc starts. Finalizing DUPLCT AUTO DIG M SYNC REC CDR After finalization has been completed, this unit enters the stop mode. CD TEXT If a CD to be duplicated has CD TEXT that can be copied, CD TEXT will be automatically copied at duplication. TOC CD 6. Load a new CD-R or CD-RW disc on the disc tray. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD-R or CD-RW disc with its recordable side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. Caution • New recordings cannot be added to a CD-R or CD-RW disc on which some tracks have been previously recorded. DUPLIACTION OF A CD Change Discs! Caution • If copying is canceled by a being pressed, only the data that has been recorded on the CD-R or CD-RW disc before cancellation remains on the disc. The original data on the HDD being copied will be deleted. When the disc tray is closed, this unit starts reading information of the CD-R or CD-RW disc loaded. When reading has been completed, copying from the HDD to a CD-R or CD-RW disc starts automatically. 1“ 1 DUPLCT AUTO DIG M SYNC 001 REC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR The copying conditions are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Move” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: “Best Effort” Note • OPC may start on the loaded CD-R or CD-RW disc depending on its recording condition after reading has been completed. OPC Adjust DUPLCT AUTO DIG M SYNC REC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 CDR When the adjustment has been completed, and the above message turns off on the display, this unit automatically starts copying. 108_HD1300(E)72-75 73 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-73 DUPLICATION OF A CD High Quality Duplication You can duplicate a CD with high quality sound with the Audio Master Quality Recording mode. Cautions • Audio Master Quality Recording mode can be used only for duplicating on a new CD-R disc. • Recordable time is 63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc, and 68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc. 1,5 2 1,5 1,5 4 2 3 MULTI JOG NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR 4 JKL 5 MNO 7 6 PQR 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE TEXT/TIME INPUT REC ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP POWER MODE MENU BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL HDD PHONES CDR COMPLETE COPY LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE A.M.Q.R. ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL HDD OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL CDR ENTER 4 ANALOG MIN MIN MAX MAX 3 1. Load a CD to be duplicated. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD with its label side facing up. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. 2. Press COPY 3 times. 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO When copying from the CD onto the HDD has been completed, the following message appears on the display. Change Discs! DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. DIG ALL SYNC This unit enters the copy standby mode. Copying has not been started yet at this stage. 3. Press A.M.Q.R. The A.M.Q.R. indicator lights up on the display. DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. 4. Start copying from the CD onto the HDD. Press w/d (w on the remote control) to start copying. The copying conditions are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Copy” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: “Best Effort” Cautions • If copying is canceled by a being pressed, even the data that has been copied before cancellation does not remain on the HDD. • If a track is copy protected by the SCMS standard, that track cannot be copied onto the HDD. 74 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R REC TOC CD 5. Load a new CD-R disc. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray, and place a CD-R disc with its recordable side facing down. Then press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to close the disc tray. Caution • New recording cannot be added to a CD-R disc on which some tracks have been previously recorded. When the disc tray is closed, this unit starts reading information of a CD-R disc loaded. When reading has been completed, copying from the HDD to a CD-R will automatically starts. AMQR DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. AUTO DIG M SYNC 1% 02.6.24, 6:52 PM REC L dB –30 –10 R The copying conditions are as follows: • Copy Method: “Digital Move” • Copy Level: 0dB • Copy Speed: 4x speed E-74 108_HD1300(E)72-75 L dB –6 –2 0 CDR DUPLICATION OF A CD Cautions • When total time of the CD to be duplicated exceeds recordable time on a CD-R disc (63 minutes for a 74-minute CD-R disc and 68 minutes for an 79-minute CD-R disc), the following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used. No Enough Spc DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. DIG ALL SYNC L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R REC TOC CD • When a CD-R disc other than a 74-minute, 79-minute or 4x writing compatible CD-R disc is loaded, or a CD-RW disc is loaded on this unit, the following message appears on the display. In this case, Audio Master Quality Recording mode cannot be used. Unavailable DIG ALL SYNC REC L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 DUPLIACTION OF A CD DUPLCT A.M.Q.R. TOC CD • Once copying starts, no button operation is effective until copying is completed. When copying has been completed, the operation of the HDD and the CD automatically stops. 108_HD1300(E)72-75 75 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-75 PLAYBACK This unit can play back tracks recorded on the 2 types of recording media; HDD and CD. Press HDD to play tracks recorded on the HDD, and press CDR to play tracks recorded on a CD (including a CD-R and a CD-RW disc). Playing a CD Playing Tracks on the HDD 1 MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER BOOKMARK TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY INPUT FINALIZE REC BOOKMARK ANALOG REC LEVEL DIGITAL REC LEVEL ERASE OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL COPY ANALOG MIN MAX INPUT FINALIZE REC ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL ANALOG MIN 2 1,2 1,2 3,4 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL 2,3 OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE RANDOM INTRO ERASE TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MENU COMPLETE HDD CLEAR CDR ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 9 YZ STU 8 VWX 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO 4 BOOKMARK REC REPEAT A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE MAX 5 4 3,4 5 GROUP SKIP HDD 1 3 2,3 4 CDR 1. Press v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control) to open the disc tray. 1. Make sure that the GROUP indicator lights up, then 2. Load the CD to be played on the disc tray and close the disc tray by pressing v (OPEN/CLOSE on the remote control). This unit starts reading the disc information. “Reading” flashes on the display during reading. 3. Start playback. When w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the first track. rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press GROUP SKIP q or GROUP SKIP w on the remote control) to select a group (disc, album, or bookmark) to be played. 2. Start playback. When w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the first track of the selected group. Dsc001 1 1 001 L dB R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 001 L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 GROUP R TOC GROUP CD 3. Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop playback 4. Press w/d (d on the remote control) to stop playback temporarily. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume playback. temporarily. Press w/d (w or d on the remote control) to resume playback. 4. Press a to stop playback. 5. Press a to stop playback. IMPORTANT • Never turn off the power of this unit during the playback. The data on the HDD may be damaged. • During the playback, make sure that this unit is not subjected to shock or vibration as the HDD may be damaged. E-76 109_HD1300(E)76-83 76 02.6.24, 6:52 PM PLAYBACK 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO MULTI JOG MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR GROUP SKIP q GROUP SKIP w GROUP SKIP BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY e INPUT REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE r ANALOG REC LEVEL HDD OPTICAL CDR COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX t/e r/y Finding the Desired Passage (Search) Press and hold r/y (r on the remote control) during playback. When the button is released, normal playback resumes. You can select the group (disc, album, or bookmark) recorded on the HDD. ■ To go backward rapidly ■ To select the desired group with the MULTI JOG knob Press and hold t/e (e on the remote control) during playback. When the button is released, normal playback resumes. Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the GROUP indicator on the display. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 PLAYBACK ■ To go forward rapidly Finding the Desired Group (Group Skip) GROUP R Notes • Search is possible in the pause mode. No sound can be heard when searching is performed during the pause mode. • Neither search nor pause is possible at the interval added by “Tr. Interval” on the ALBUM EDITING menu (see page 38). Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise to advance to the next group and the following groups or counterclockwise to return to the previous group and other previous groups. ■ To advance to the next group Press GROUP SKIP w on the remote control. Press GROUP SKIP w repeatedly to advance to other groups. ■ To return to the previous group Press GROUP SKIP q on the remote control. Press GROUP SKIP q repeatedly to return to other previous groups. Notes • Group skip is possible in the play, pause and stop modes. • Playback starts from the beginning of the first track of the selected group. E-77 109_HD1300(E)76-83 77 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English Resume Play function If you press w/d (w on the remote control) after a has been pressed to stop playback, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the track that has been stopped. This function is called “Resume Play”. To cancel the “Resume Play” function, press a to stop playback first and then press a again. After the cancellation, this unit starts playback from the beginning of the first track recorded on a disc (or an album) or a CD. PLAYBACK 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE COPY TIMER REC REC MULTI JOG A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE ERASE MULTI JOG ER PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME INPUT MODE TRACK NO. WRITE MENU BOOKMARK GROUP SKIP t y DIGITAL REC LEVEL COMPLETE COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE A.M.Q.R. ANALOG REC LEVEL HDD OPTICAL CLEAR COAXIAL CDR ENTER ANALOG MIN MAX t/e r/y Numeric buttons 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO Finding the Desired Track (Track Skip) ■ To select the desired track number with the MULTI JOG knob Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the TRACK indicator on the display. TRACK L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 ■ To play the desired track Select the desired track by using the numeric buttons on the remote control. The selected track number appears on the display. Example: To select track 25 Press +10 twice, and then immediately press 5 once. 0 R Rotate the MULTI JOG knob clockwise to advance to the next track and the following tracks or counterclockwise to return to the previous track and other previous tracks. Note • If a number higher than the last track number recorded on a disc (or an album) or a CD is entered by using the remote control, this unit plays the last track. ■ To advance to the next track Press r/y (y on the remote control). Press r/y (y on the remote control) repeatedly to skip to other tracks. ■ To return to the beginning of the track being played Note • Track skip is possible in the play, pause and stop modes. Press t/e (t on the remote control) once during playback. ■ To return to the previous track Press t/e (t on the remote control) twice during playback. Press t/e (t on the remote control) repeatedly to return to other previous tracks. E-78 109_HD1300(E)76-83 78 02.6.24, 6:52 PM PLAYBACK Selecting Tracks Using On-ScreenDisplay (OSD) ■ Select a track 1. Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the TRACK indicator. TRACK You can display a list of groups and tracks to be played by connecting this unit to a monitor. If you display the list on a screen, it is much easier to see than on the display. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R The following list will be displayed on a monitor. Note • When “VIDEO Output” on the system utility is set to OFF, no OSD signals will be output. Set it to ON to have an on-screendisplay (see page 87). Grp Tr. 9 1- Aaaaa 2- Bbbbb 3- Ccccc 4- Ddddd 5- Eeeee 6- Fffff 7- Ggggg 8- Hhhhh 9- Iiiii 10- Jjjjj 11- Kkkkk ■ Select a group 1. Press the MULTI JOG knob to turn on the GROUP 0:00 indicator. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 GROUP 0 R The following list will be displayed on a monitor. Tr. 1 AAAAA BBBBB CCCCC MY BEST MY BEST 2 [Bookmark] 0:00 Note • The track with a bookmark has *(asterisk) added in front of the track number. Listening with Headphones PLAYBACK Grp Dsc 1: Dsc 2: Dsc 3: Alb 1: Alb 2: Mark : control) to select a group. The selected group indicator will be in reverse video. Connect your headphones to the PHONES jack and adjust the volume with the LEVEL control. 2. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to select a group. The selected group indicator will be in reverse video. NATURAL SOUND HDD/CD RECORDER POWER HDD PHONES CDR COPY LEVEL REC A.M.Q.R. MIN MAX Adjust the headphones volume Connect your headphones Caution • If the power of other components such as an amplifier connected to this unit is not turned on, the sound of this unit may be distorted. If this occurs, use the headphones with the other component’s power turned on. 109_HD1300(E)76-83 79 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-79 VARIOUS PLAYBACK This unit provides various playback methods according to the setting. The following steps describe the setting procedure for each setting. Notes • The setting of play style, random play, repeat play, and intro play can be set during the playback. • The setting of play style, random play, and full repeat play is memorized even after the power of this unit has been turned off. Finding the Desired Passage by Time (Time Search) You can search the desired part by setting the time. 1. Press HDD or CDR to select a drive to operate. 2. Press MODE to enter the playback mode setting. “Time Search” appears on the display. Setting the Play Style Only when playing sources recorded on the HDD, you can set the play style. The play style setting changes the range of playback. 1. Press HDD to select the HDD. 2. Press MODE to display the playback mode setting. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to display “Play Style”. Time Search Play Style L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R L dB G 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The following message appears on the display. 001 1 –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to start the play style setting. 5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote 012 control) to display “Style All” or “Style Group”. L dB G R –30 –10 –6 –2 0 TIME Style All Time to be searched L dB A –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –2 0 R 4. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to set the time to be searched. If you stop rotating the MULTI JOG knob, this unit starts searching the set time and starts playback from the set time. Notes • You can start searching the set time by pressing the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) also. • You can skip to other tracks by pressing t/e or r/y (t or y on the remote control). When the track is skipped to another track, the set time will be reset to “0:00”. • You can skip to other groups by pressing GROUP SKIP q or GROUP SKIP w on the remote control. When the group is skipped to another group, the set time will be reset to “0:00”. • You cannot search by pressing t/e or r/y (e or r on the remote control) during the time search mode. 5. Press MODE to return to the normal playback. Note • You cannot search by time during the random play or the intro play. Style Group L dB G control) to confirm the selection. ■ When “Style All” is confirmed The A indicator lights on the display. A Random play, full repeat play, or intro play can be set for one of the group categories (disc, album, and bookmark) recorded on the HDD. Disc 1 Disc 2 Album 1 Album 2 E-80 80 –6 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Bookmark 109_HD1300(E)76-83 –30 –10 R 02.6.24, 6:52 PM Group category for making a setting VARIOUS PLAYBACK • When random play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected group category are played in a random sequence. • When full repeat play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected group category are repeatedly played. • When intro play is set, the beginnings of all tracks that belong to the selected group category are played one after another. For example, if full repeat play is set during the playback of disc 1, all tracks recorded to discs 1 and 2 are repeatedly played. Notes • If “Style All” is set and the title is shown on the display, the sound may be missing when this unit switches from one disc to another. To avoid this problem, switch the display to from the indication of time by pressing TEXT/TIME (see page 11). • Select “Style All” when sequentially playing the sources recorded for long hours extending several discs. ■ When “Style Group” is confirmed The G indicator lights on the display. You can listen to a single desired track or to a track being played repeatedly. ■ To set single repeat play 1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used. 2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to display “Repeat”. Repeat L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to start setting single repeat play. 5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote Random play, full repeat play, or intro play can be set for one of the groups (disc, album, and bookmark) recorded on the HDD. Disc 1 Repeat Single L S dB REP –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Disc 2 Group for making a setting Album 2 PLAYBACK control) to display “Repeat Single”. G Album 1 Single Repeat Play control) to confirm the selection. The S REP indicator lights on the display. S REP Bookmark • When random play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected group are played in a random sequence. • When full repeat play is set, all tracks that belong to the selected group are repeatedly played. • When intro play is set, the beginnings of all tracks that belong to the selected group are played one after another. For example, if full repeat play is set during the playback of disc 1, all tracks recorded to disc 1 are repeatedly played. Notes • Single repeat play can be easily set by pressing REPEAT on the remote control once. • The track being played is repeatedly played even during playback of an album or random play. ■ To cancel the single repeat play setting Select and confirm “Repeat Off” in step 5 for “To set single repeat play” or press REPEAT on the remote control repeatedly until the S REP indicator turns off on the display. 109_HD1300(E)76-83 81 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-81 VARIOUS PLAYBACK Full Repeat Play Random Play You can repeatedly listen to all tracks recorded in a group (or a CD) or group category. You can listen to all tracks recorded in a group on the HDD or on a CD in a random sequence. ■ To set full repeat play ■ To set random play 1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used. 2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote 1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used. 2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to display “Repeat”. control) to display “Random”. Repeat Random L dB G L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to start setting full repeat play. 5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to display “Repeat Full”. dB G R 0 5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to display “Random On”. Random On L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 G R 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the selection. The REP indicator lights on the display. G –2 control) to start setting random play. L dB REP –6 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Repeat Full G –30 –10 R dB RNDM –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the selection. The RNDM indicator lights on the display. REP G RNDM Notes • Full repeat play can be easily set by pressing REPEAT on the remote control twice. • The tracks are repeatedly played in the same random order if played in the random play mode. Notes • Random play can be easily set by pressing RANDOM on the remote control. • If random play is set during playback, the new setting applies to the next track. ■ To cancel the full repeat play setting ■ To start random play Select and confirm “Repeat Off” in step 5 for “To set full repeat play” or press REPEAT on the remote control repeatedly until the REP indicator turns off on the display. When random play is set, press w/d (w on the remote control) to start random play. ■ To stop random play Press a. ■ To cancel the random play setting Select and confirm “Random Off” in step 5 for “To set random play” or press RANDOM on the remote control. The RNDM indicator turns off on the display. E-82 109_HD1300(E)76-83 82 02.6.24, 6:52 PM VARIOUS PLAYBACK Intro Play Bookmark Play You can listen to the beginnings of the tracks for a set amount of time one after another. You can easily listen to a group of desired tracks by selecting a list of tracks with bookmarks. ■ To set intro play ■ To place a bookmark 1. Press HDD or CDR to select the drive to be used. 2. Press MODE to start the playback mode setting. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote Press TRACK NO./BOOKMARK (BOOKMARK on the remote control) during playback of the desired track. Tracks are listed and stored in order that the bookmarks have been placed. See “BOOKMARK” on page 59. ■ Start playback of the track with a bookmark control) to display “Intros Scan”. Intros Scan L dB G –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote 5. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote Interval: 5 L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R control) to select “Mark”. When selecting “Mark” on a CD Mark 1 L dB MARK –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –6 –2 0 R Mark 1 L After the playback time for intro play has been set in step 5 for “To set intro play”, press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to confirm the setting or press w/d (w on the remote control) to start intro play. • • • • • Notes Intro play can be easily started by pressing INTRO on the remote control. The beginning of the selected track is repeatedly played if single repeat is set. When “Style Group” is set with the full repeat play mode, the beginnings of all tracks recorded in the selected group are repeatedly played. When “Style All” is set with the full repeat play mode, the beginnings of all tracks recorded in the selected group category are repeatedly played. The beginnings of randomly selected tracks are played if random play is set. TOC GROUP CD When selecting “Mark” on the HDD MARK ■ To start intro play PLAYBACK control) to set the amount of time to play the beginning of each track. The playback time can be set in the 1 to 10 seconds range by 1 second steps and in the 10 seconds to 60 seconds range by 5 seconds steps. dB control) to turn on the GROUP indicator on the display. 3. Rotate the MULTI JOG knob (press +/– on the remote control) to start setting intro play. G 1. Press HDD or CDR to select a drive to operate. 2. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote dB G –30 –10 GROUP R 4. Start playback. Playback starts from the beginning of the first track when w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed. Note • Tracks are played in the order that bookmarks have been placed. 5. To stop playback temporarily, press w/d (d on the remote control). To resume playback, press w/d (w or d on the remote control). ■ To stop intro play Press a. ■ To cancel the intro play setting Press INTRO on the remote control. 109_HD1300(E)76-83 83 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-83 DAC (DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTER) MODE This unit has a DAC mode function. You can switch the input signals, as an input selector, to output from both the analog and digital jacks to the amplifier connected to this unit. 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 0 SPACE +10 SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM INTRO OPEN/CLOSE 5 2,3,4 1,5 COPY MULTI JOG ER TIMER REC A.M.Q.R. FINALIZE REC ERASE PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR TEXT/TIME BOOKMARK MODE DIGITAL REC LEVEL COPY INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL A.M.Q.R. COAXIAL ANALOG MIN MAX 4 4 5 5 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “DAC Mode” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). DAC Mode L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 INPUT 0 1,5 5 TRACK NO. WRITE GROUP SKIP MENU COMPLETE CLEAR ENTER 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 PQR 7 STU 8 VWX 9 YZ 2 3 HDD CDR 5 5 +10 0 SPACE SYMBOL BOOKMARK REPEAT RANDOM NTRO 4. The input source selected by INPUT is output both from the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks and from the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) jacks. • When OPTICAL or COAXIAL is selected, the MULTI JOG knob functions as a volume control. • When ANALOG is selected, the ANALOG REC LEVEL control functions as a volume control. R 5. Any of the following operation cancel the DAC mode 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to enter the DAC mode. and start normal operation. • Press w/d (w on the remote control) to play the drive that had been selected before entering the DAC mode. • Press a to set this unit in the stop mode. • Press COMPLETE to set this unit in the stop mode. • Press MENU to return to the menu item selection. E-84 110_HD1300(E)84-94 84 02.7.26, 4:20 PM HDD UTILITY ■ To check the HDD utility (HDD Info.) ■ To format the HDD (HDD Format) You can check the HDD utility (capacity, usage, and available space) of this unit. You can format the HDD in this unit. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “HDD Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. HDD Utility The display changes for the menu item selection. L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 2. Select “HDD Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to display “HDD Info.”. control). The display changes for the HDD utility item selection. HDD Info. L dB Cautions • After the HDD has been formatted, all data about the recorded tracks and settings will be erased from the HDD. • After all data on the HDD have been initialized, the undo function cannot be applied to any editing operations before formatting. –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 4. Select “HDD Format” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) again to display the capacity of the HDD. Each time the MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote control is pressed), the display changes as follows. Indications are made by time. Total L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 5. “Initialize ?” appears on the display when the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed. 30h40m L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 Initialize ? 0 L R dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 6. “Format Really” appears on the display to make a Usage (total used time) Used 2h 3m L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R APPENDIX Capacity (total time) HDD Format confirmation when w/d (w on the remote control) is pressed. Format Really L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R If you wish to format the HDD, press INPUT. If not, press a. Available space (recordable time) Avail 28h 9m L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 R Note • The times displayed are rough estimates. 0 7. “Format OK” appears in the display when INPUT is pressed. Then the display returns to the one when the power of this unit was turned on. Caution • The method explained above cannot be used to format an HDD newly installed. To format an HDD newly installed, see the attached instruction. 110_HD1300(E)84-94 85 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-85 SYSTEM UTILITY ■ To check the firmware version (Firm. Version) ■ To initialize the setting for each item (Initialize) Software that is called “firmware” is built into this unit. This firmware controls the operation. The following steps describe the firmware version check procedures. You can initialize the settings that have been changed. The OPC data stored in this unit is also initialized. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). –6 –2 (pressing +/– on the remote control). control). The display changes for the system utility item selection. L –30 –10 The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote Sys. Utility dB 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. 0 R 4. Select “Initialize” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) to display “Firm. Version”. (pressing +/– on the remote control). Initialize L Firm. Version dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 5. “Initialize ?” appears on the display if the MULTI JOG 4. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) again to display the version of the firmware. knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed. Initialize ? L V1.0.00 Jun 2 dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 6. Press COMPLETE. The display switches in the order of the system firmware version ➞ the CDR drive firmware version ➞ type of HDD as the MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote control is pressed). The display returns to the one when the power of this unit is turned on. System firmware version V1.0.00 Jun 2 L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R CDR drive firmware version CDRW 1.0D L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Type of HDD ABCDEFGHIJKLM L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R E-86 110_HD1300(E)84-94 86 02.7.26, 4:21 PM SYSTEM UTILITY ■ To change the display brightness (Dimmer Setup) ■ To set the video output (VIDEO Output) You can change the brightness of the display. You can switch the on-screen display output through the VIDEO OUT jacks on and off. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the system utility item selection. 4. Select “Dimmer Setup” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the system utility item selection. 4. Select “VIDEO Output” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). VIDEO Output Dimmer Setup L L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 dB 0 5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed. Dimmer Bright –2 0 MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed. VIDEO On L –30 –10 –6 –2 dB 0 Dimmer Bright L –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R –6 –2 0 Switch “VIDEO On” and “VIDEO Off” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Note • Initial setting is “VIDEO On”. APPENDIX The selection and the brightness change in 3 levels as the MULTI JOG knob is rotated (+/– on the remote control is pressed). –30 –10 R R dB –6 5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the L dB –30 –10 R R 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) or COMPLETE. The on-screen display output is set to on or off. Dimmer Mid L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 –2 0 R Note • If “VIDEO Off” is selected, the video circuit inside this unit is also turned off. You can enjoy the playback or recording in higher quality sound. Dimmer Dark L dB –30 –10 –6 R Note • Initial setting is “Dimmer Bright”. 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) or COMPLETE. The display brightness has been set. 110_HD1300(E)84-94 87 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-87 SYSTEM UTILITY ■ To set auto play (Auto Play) You can set the auto play function which automatically starts playback when the power of this unit is turned on. 1. Press MENU while this unit is in the stop mode. ■ To update the firmware version (Firm. Update) This menu is prepared for the expansion of the functions in the future. The display changes for the menu item selection. 2. Select “Sys. Utility” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). 3. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control). The display changes for the system utility item selection. 4. Select “Auto Play” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Auto Play L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R 5. The current setting is indicated on the display if the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) is pressed. Auto Play Off L dB –30 –10 –6 –2 0 R Switch “Auto Play On” and “Auto Play Off” by rotating the MULTI JOG knob (pressing +/– on the remote control). Note • Initial setting is “Auto Play Off”. 6. Press the MULTI JOG knob (ENTER on the remote control) or COMPLETE. The auto play function is set to on or off. If the auto play function is set to on, the setting will be applied when the power of this unit is turned on the next time. • This unit plays data on the drive that had been last selected when the power of this unit was last turned off. • This unit plays in the playback mode (such as random play) that had been last set when the power of this unit was last turned off. Note • The setting for the timer recording takes precedence over the setting for the auto play function. If the timer recording is set, this unit starts recording when the power of this unit is turned on the next time even when “Auto Play On” is selected. See page 22 for the timer recording. E-88 110_HD1300(E)84-94 88 02.6.24, 6:52 PM ON-SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) You can display the list of groups or tracks to be played, copying/recording settings and the list of the setting items on the monitor by connecting the monitor to this unit. ■ List of groups or tracks ■ List of setting items The numbers and titles of groups, or the numbers and titles of tracks are displayed. Press the MULTI JOG knob to switch the list displayed. The names of items to be set are displayed. Grp Dsc 1: Dsc 2: Dsc 3: Alb 1: Alb 2: Mark : Tr. 1 AAAAA BBBBB CCCCC MY BEST MY BEST 2 [Bookmark] 0:00 Album Edit Track Edit Disc Edit Undo HDD Utility Sys. Utility Synchro Setup DAC Mode Example: when setting the menu Grp Tr. 9 1- Aaaaa 2- Bbbbb 3- Ccccc 4- Ddddd 5- Eeeee 6- Fffff 7- Ggggg 8- Hhhhh 9- Iiiii 10- Jjjjj 11- Kkkkk 0:00 ■ Display during titling This is displayed while the title is being assigned to albums, tracks, or discs. Dsc 3 Tr. 1 A ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuv wxyz0123456789!"#$&%'()* +,-./:;<=>?@[÷]^å' {|}` ■ Display during copying The settings for copying are displayed. APPENDIX Example: when titling the track ≥ Mode Level Method Speed Copy : All Synchro : 0.0dB : Digital Copy : Best Effort Dsc003… 1π 1 0:00 Example: when copying from a CD to the HDD ■ Display during recording The setting for recording are displayed. Rec Mode Level Input : Track Synchro : 0.0dB : OPTICAL Dsc003… 1 0:00 Example: when recording to the HDD 110_HD1300(E)84-94 89 02.7.26, 4:22 PM English E-89 DISPLAY MESSAGES Can’t Copy This message is displayed for approximately 3 seconds when digital recording or copying is not possible according to the SCMS standard. See “Rules of Digital Recording” on page 5. Can’t Edit This message is displayed when a prohibited editing operation has been attempted. Can’t Tr.Lev. The album with its tracks’ level adjusted is to be copied to a CD-R disc in the Audio Master Quality Recording mode. Can’t use HDD The loaded HDD has been formatted by other CDR-HD1300s. Reformat by the CDR-HD1300 on which you plan to use that HDD, following the instruction on page 85. Change Discs! This message informs that a CD needs to be changed to a disc to be used for duplicating when copying from a CD onto the HDD has been completed. Check Disc This unit fails to read the CD because the CD has been loaded on the disc tray upside down or the CD has remarkable scratch on it, or some kind of error has been occurred during operation. Check the disc, and exchange the CD if necessary. Data Track This message is displayed when the data track is being played. Disc Full This message is displayed when recording to a CD-R or CD-RW disc cannot be performed any further because the recording has been made up to the total recordable time. Disc No.Full When the number of discs recorded on the HDD has reached its maximum of 999 discs, this message is displayed if more discs have been attempted to be added. Drive Check Some kind of error has been occurred in the HDD or the CDR drive. Contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. Or HDD is not set to “slave” precisely. Refer to the attached instruction and set the HDD to “slave”. Erasing Erasing a CD-RW disc is being performed. The erasing progress is indicated by the level meter. Format Really This message confirms starting the format of the HDD after “Initialize ?” appears. HDD Full This message is displayed when recording to the HDD cannot be performed any further because the recording has been made up to the total recordable time. Initialize ? This message confirms starting the format of the HDD, or the initialization of each item. Invalid Mode The recording mode that cannot be selected during the timer recording setting has been selected. New Disc The disc in the disc tray is either a new CD-R or CD-RW disc, or a CD-RW disc that has been erased by using a Disc Erase or All Erase. No Data There are no tracks (data) recorded on the HDD. No Disc There are no CDs on the disc tray. No Enough Spc There is not enough space for copying, or the track number exceeds the maximum number when copying. No Input There are no input signals when attempting the recording from the external components digitally. No Previous When making “Tr. Interval” on the ALBUM EDITING menu or “Track Adjust” on the TRACK EDITING menu, there is no track before the track to be edited. No Source There is no source recorded on the HDD or CDs when copying. Not Audio A non-audio CD-R or CD-RW disc, such as a CD-R or CD-RW disc for PCs, has been loaded in the disc tray, and recording has been attempted on that CD-R or CD-RW disc. No Undo data Undo is not possible. Finalize OK? This message confirms starting the finalization of a CD-R or CDRW disc. If you wish to finalize, press w/d (w on the remote control). OPC Adjust This message is displayed while OPC (Optimum Power Calibration) optimized the laser power to the reflectivity of the disc. Approximately 15 seconds may be required to complete this automatic adjustment. However, this time length may change according to the type of the disc that has been loaded. Finalizing Finalization is being performed. The finalization progress is indicated by the level meter. Pack Before ! This message is displayed when the editing operation cannot be done unless “Pack” is performed. E-90 110_HD1300(E)84-94 90 02.6.24, 6:52 PM DISPLAY MESSAGES Reading This unit reads the format of the CD, CD-R, or CD-RW disc loaded on the disc tray. Approximately 15 seconds may be required to complete this automatic adjustment. However, this time length may change according to the type of the CD, CD-R, or CD-RW disc that has been loaded. Slow Fnlz OK? This message confirms starting the slow finalization of a CD-R or CD-RW disc. If you wish to finalize, press w/d (w on the remote control). Standby This message is displayed for several seconds after REC has been pressed to record on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. TEXT Save? This message is displayed when the disc tray has been attempted to be opened without performing finalization after copying the data including the titles (disc title, track title, and album title) to a CD-R or CD-RW disc. Timer Standby This message is displayed after the timer recording setting has been completed, or displayed for approximate 5 seconds before the timer recording starts. APPENDIX Track No.Full One disc can contain up to 99 tracks. Recording is attempted on the disc that has reached the maximum number. Unavailable The CD-R disc whose recordable time is other than 74 minutes or 79 minutes or the CD-R disc which does not support 4x writing, or the CD-RW disc has been loaded when copying in the Audio Master Quality Recording mode. Unrecordable In recording or copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, the disc cannot be used for recording or copying. Or in recording or copying onto the HDD, no space is available. Wait This message flashes while this unit is writing information to the PMA (program Memory Area) after a is pressed in recording onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc, or flashes while processing the data on the HDD or detecting the loaded HDD when this unit is turned on. 110_HD1300(E)84-94 91 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-91 TROUBLESHOOTING If this unit fails to operate normally, check the following points to determine whether the fault can be corrected by the simple measures suggested. If they cannot be corrected, or if the fault is not listed in the SYMPTOM column, disconnect the power cord and contact your authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for assistance. SYMPTOM This unit does not turn on when POWER is pressed. Playback does not begin with the CD loaded. Playback is delayed, or begins at the wrong place. Recording/copying is not possible. CAUSE Securely connect the power cable. There is moisture on the laser pick-up. Turn the power of this unit and wait 20 to 30 minutes before trying to play. Reload the CD with the label side facing up. Clean the CD. Check the CD carefully. Replace it if necessary. The CD has been loaded upside down. The CD is dirty. The CD may be scratched or damaged. The CD-R or CD-RW disc has been finalized. The CD-R or CD-RW disc that has completed recording is loaded. INPUT is not correctly set. Further digital recording or copying has been attempted from the digitally copied sources. There is not enough available space left or 99 tracks have already been recorded on the disc. There is no available space on the HDD. If the power cable was unplugged or there was a power outage during recording, the recorded material may be lost. The CD-R or CD-RW disc is dirty or damaged. The HDD is not installed properly. Some vibration and rotation noise are created during the copying. Continuous recording cannot be made on a disc on the HDD beyond 100 minutes. The beginning of the track is missing during the playback when this unit is connected digitally to an amplifier. The sound is missing when this unit switches one disc to another. A CD-R or CD-RW that has been recorded with this unit cannot be played on the other CD player or DVD player. Sound “skips”. This unit makes noise. REMEDY The power cable is not completely connected. This unit copies by rotating the CD, CD-R or CD-RW disc at high speed. The maximum recordable time for a disc on the HDD is 99 minutes 59 seconds. The tracks that have different emphases have been played. Load a recordable CD that has not been finalized yet. Load a recordable CD. Set INPUT to the correct position according to the input signal. Switch to ANALOG to make a recording. Load a recordable disc (for a CD-R or CD-RW disc). Select the other discs (for the HDD). Erase the space not being used to create available space on the HDD for further recording. If the recording of a CD-RW disc is interrupted, try recording again from the beginning. When the recording of a CD-R disc is interrupted, start recording over again with a disc that can be recorded on. Clean or replace the CD-R or CD-RW disc. Install the HDD properly following the attached instruction. Lower the copying speed to decrease vibration and rotation noise. Regardless of the recording mode, the recording will be performed continuously to the next available disc after the recording has been performed to one disc for its maximum length. Connect to the amplifier using the ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) jacks. The titles appear on the display during the playback of the part that has been recorded stretching over the two discs. Your CD or DVD player is not compatible with CD-R or CD-RW discs. The CD-R or CD-RW disc has not been finalized. Press TEXT/TIME to switch the display to the indication of time. This unit and/or the component connected is being subjected to vibration or impact. Relocate the unit. (This is not possible if the skipping sound is already on the recording due to vibrations or impact that occurred during recording.) Clean the CD. Properly connect the audio pin cables. Replace the audio cables. The CD is dirty. Connection has not correctly been made. Use a CD or DVD player compatible with CD-R or CDRW discs. Finalize the CD-R or CD-RW disc. E-92 110_HD1300(E)84-94 92 02.6.24, 6:52 PM TROUBLESHOOTING SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY This unit does not operate properly. There is rotation noise of the fan. A noise occurs at the change of the tracks that has been recorded from the analog record and edited. Remote control does not work. The internal microcomputer has been frozen. Turn off the power of this unit and then turn on again after about one minute. The fan starts to rotate to cool off the temperature inside this unit. Improvement can be made by adding a short fade-in or fade-out to the track. TV does not correctly function when the remote control is being used. The picture on the TV is impaired. The HDD cannot be selected. A very low frequency component among the wow and flutter of the analog record is being output as a noise. The batteries of the remote control are too weak. Remote control is from too far. Remote control is being used at an incorrect angle. Direct sunlight or lighting (of an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor. Replace 2 batteries with new ones. Remote control is being used near TV set with a remote control sensor. Relocate this unit away from the TV or cover the TV’s remote control sensor. The indoor antenna is used. Use an outdoor antenna, or set this unit away from the TV set. Install the HDD properly following the attached instruction. Format it on CDR-HD1300 you plan to use with. The HDD is not installed properly. The HDD newly installed is not formatted on CDR-HD1300 you plan to use that HDD with. The HDD is not set to “slave” properly. Use the remote control within 6m and 60 degrees radius. Change the position so that the remote control sensor is not exposed to strong lighting. Set the HDD to “slave” properly following the instruction on the HDD. APPENDIX “Drive Check” appears on the display. The temperature inside this unit rises. ABOUT PRODUCT INFORMATIONS YAMAHA Audio and Video website contain the latest product information, etc. Refer to the website to check the latest information. YAMAHA Audio and Video website: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/av/ 110_HD1300(E)84-94 93 02.6.24, 6:52 PM English E-93 SPECIFICATIONS ■ Audio Performance ■ Outputs Frequency response .................................... 5 to 20,000 Hz, ±0.5 dB ANALOG LINE OUT (PLAY) Type ............................................................................... Pin jack Standard output level (1 kHz, 0 dB) ..................... 2.0±0.5 Vrms S/N ratio (EIAJ) Playback ......................................................................... 105 dB Recording ......................................................................... 92 dB Total harmonic distortion (1 kHz) Playback ........................................................................ 0.004 % Recording ...................................................................... 0.006 % Dynamic range Playback ........................................................................... 99 dB Recording ......................................................................... 92 dB ■ Laser Diode Properties Material ................................................................................ GaAIAs Wavelength ................................................................. 780 to 787 nm Pulse Durations and Max. Output at the lens of the Laser Pickup Unit Read Mode ............................................ 0.85 mW (Continuous) Write Mode .......................... Max. 48 mW (for 212 ns, Min. Cycle 57.9 ns) ■ Inputs ANALOG LINE IN (REC) Type ............................................................................... Pin jack Standard input level ............................................ 500 mV/24 kΩ DIGITAL IN (OPTICAL) Type ............................................. Square optical connector jack DIGITAL IN (COAXIAL) Type ........................................................................ Coaxial jack Standard input level .......................................... 0.5 Vp-p (75 Ω) DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) Type ............................................. Square optical connector jack DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) Type ........................................................................ Coaxial jack Standard output level ........................................ 0.5 Vp-p (75 Ω) PHONES Standard output level (Input 150 Ω shorted, –20 dB) ............................................................................ 300 mV/150 Ω ■ General Power supply [U.S.A. model] ................................................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ............................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power consumption .................................................................. 37 W Operating environment Temperature .............................................................. +5 to 35°C Humidity .............................. 30 to 90 % RH (No condensation) Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................ 435 x 115.5 x 414.5 mm (17-1/8” x 4-1/2” x 16-5/16”) Weight ............................................. 8.4 kg (18 lbs. 8 oz.) with HDD 7.8 kg (17 lbs. 3 oz.) with no HDD Specifications are subject to change without notice. E-94 110_HD1300(E)84-94 94 02.6.24, 6:52 PM CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 ATTENTION L’emploi de commandes, de réglages ou un choix de procédures différents des spécifications de cette brochure peut entraîner une exposition à d’éventuelles radiations pouvant être dangereses. VIDEO OUT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 VIDEO L L R ACHTUNG Die Verwendung von Bedienungselementen oder Einstellungen oder die Durchführung von Bedienungsvorgängen, die nicht in dieser Anleitung aufgeführt sind, kann zu einem Kontakt mit gefährlichen Laserstrahlen führen. S VIDEO 4 R REC PLAY 3 COAXIAL LINE IN — LINE OUT OPTICAL COAXIAL IN OPTICAL RS–232C OUT ANALOG DIGITAL (For U.S.A. model) CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 OBSERVERA Användning av kontroller och justeringar eller genomförande av procedurer andra än de som specificeras i denna bok kan resultera i att du utsätter dig för farlig strålning. VIDEO OUT S VIDEO ATTENZIONE Uso di controlli o regolazioni o procedure non specificamente descritte può causare l’esposizione a radiazioni di livello pericoloso. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPART PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 VIDEO L L R 4 R REC PLAY 3 LINE IN — LINE OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL IN ANALOG OPTICAL OUT RS–232C DIGITAL (For U.K. and Europe models) PRECAUCIÓN El uso de los controles o los procedimientos de ajuste o utilización diferentes de los especificados en este manual pueden causar una exposición peligrosa a la radiación. CAUTION - VISIBLE AND / OR INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. VARNING - SYNLIG OCH / ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. VARO ! VOORZICHTIG Gebruik van bedieningsorganen of instellingen, of uitvoeren van handelingen anders dan staan beschreven in deze handleiding kunnen leiden tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke stralen. VARNING AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA / TAI NÄKYMÄTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. - SYNLIG OCH / ELLER OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. VORSICHT ! SICHTBARE UND / ODER UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. ATTENTION - RADIATION VISIBLE ET / OU INVISIBLE LORSQUE L'ALLAREIL EST OUVERT. EVITEZ TOUTE EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. VARO! AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. VARNING! OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. Caution.H3 1 02.6.28, 9:48 AM UAB CDR-HD1300/CDR-HD1300E CDR-HD1300 CDR-HD1300E HDD/CD Recorder Enregistreur CD/Disque Dur MULTI JOG PUSH ENTER TEXT/TIME MODE MENU TRACK NO. COMPLETE CLEAR BOOKMARK DIGITAL REC LEVEL INPUT REC FINALIZE ERASE ANALOG REC LEVEL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG MIN YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 000_HD1300(CA)H14_(7.5mm) 2 MAX OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI Printed in Malaysia V956620-1 02.7.26, 4:33 PM CDR-HD1300 CDR-HD1300E HDD Installation Manual Manuel d’installation du disque dur Festplattenspeicher-Installationshandbuch Hårddiskinstallationsanvisningar Manuale d’installazione dell’HDD Manual de instalación del disco duro Installatiehandleiding voor de harde schijf 999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 1 02.6.28, 9:19 AM INSTALLING THE HDD There are some models that do not have a built-in hard disk drive (HDD) depending on the sales location. Please purchase a commercially available HDD for internal use and install it on this unit correctly, referring to the instruction below. ■ Required specifications of the HDD Interface .................................................................... IDE/ATA type 1. Loosen the two fixing screws on the HDD slot door and open the HDD slot door. Data Transfer Mode ........................................ PIO mode 0 to 4 and Multi-word DMA mode 0 to 2 compatible Size ............................................................................. 3.5-inch type Capacity ..................................................................... 20 to 137 GB ■ Installation procedures Before installation • Turn off the power of this unit and unplug the AC power cable from the wall outlet. • Disconnect all the connections. • Set the HDD to SLAVE (see description below). MASTER or SLAVE setting on the HDD It is necessary to set the HDD to MASTER or SLAVE when connecting the HDD to the component you plan to use. This unit is designed to operate HDD when it is set to SLAVE. Usually, setting procedure is written on the HDD itself. Fixing screws 2. Pull out the HDD tray. • Be careful not to hook the IDE cable and the power cable over the HDD tray. • Do not apply the excessive force on the HDD tray. Example: When setting the WD800AB model 3. Place the HDD on the HDD tray. Plastic shunt • HDD is a very sensitive device. Be careful not to give any shock to it. The HDD is set to slave by setting the plastic shunt at the second position from right of the jumper switch. Example: When setting the ST340810A model 4. Tighten the four fixing screws. The HDD is set to slave by setting no plastic shunt at any position of the jumper switch. Fixing screws (Screws are on the opposite side) E-1 999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 2 02.6.28, 9:19 AM ■ Installation procedures (continued) ■ Formatting the HDD 5. Push the HDD tray and connect the IDE cable and the If you install a new HDD, you need to format the HDD before using with this unit. power cable. • Make sure that the terminals and connectors are in the correct direction, and connect the cables securely. • Static electricity can damage the HDD. Be careful not to touch the terminal pins and the circuit board. • Do not apply excessive force on the HDD tray. 1. Connect the AC power cable to the wall outlet and turn on the power of this unit. “Format Start?” appears on the display. 2. Press w/d. “Format Really” appears on the display. 3. Press w/d. “Push PLAY KEY” appears on the display. 4. Press w/d. “Wait” flashes on the display. After a few seconds, this unit starts formatting of the HDD. It takes approximately 15 seconds to complete formatting. 5. When formatting has been completed, “Format OK” appears on the display. Then the display returns to the one when the power of this unit was turned on. IDE cable Power cable 6. Close the HDD slot door and tighten the two fixing screws on the HDD slot door. Note • Formatting is not necessary for the HDD that has been formatted on CDR-HD1300 you use. However, you need to format the HDD that has been formatted on other CDR-HD1300s following the steps on page 83 of the owner’s manual. ■ Recommended HDDs Following HDDs have been proved by YAMAHA for their compatibility with CDR-HD1300 (as of June, 2002). Manufacturers Seagate Fixing screws Western Digital Series/Model No. U6 Series/ST340810A U6CE Series/ ST340810ACE BARRACUDA ATA IV Series/ST380021A Caviar Series/WD800AB Capacity 40 GB 80 GB *You can find the information about the recommended HDD at the YAMAHA Audio and Video website: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/av/ *Company names and product names refered in this instruction are trademarks of their respective companies. 999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 3 02.6.28, 9:19 AM English E-2 Printed in Malaysia 999_HD1300(HDD)_GB 16 02.6.28, 9:19 AM WA08420